625696
492
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/498
Pagina verder
Seats and Restraint Systems
....................... 7
Front Seats
.............................................. 9
Rear Seats
............................................. 16
Safety Belts
............................................ 18
Child Restraints
...................................... 38
Airbag System
........................................ 64
Restraint System Check
......................... 82
Features and Controls
................................ 85
Keys
....................................................... 87
Doors and Locks
.................................... 92
Windows
................................................ 99
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 101
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
..... 106
Mirrors
.................................................. 121
OnStar
®
System
................................... 125
Universal Home Remote System
.......... 128
Storage Areas
...................................... 139
Moonroof
.............................................. 144
Instrument Panel
....................................... 145
Instrument Panel Overview
................... 148
Climate Controls
................................... 167
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
.......................................... 174
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............ 194
Audio System(s)
................................... 212
Driving Your Vehicle
................................. 263
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 264
Towing
................................................. 302
2007 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M
1
Service and Appearance Care
.................. 319
Service
................................................. 322
Fuel
...................................................... 324
Checking Things Under the Hood
......... 329
All-Wheel Drive
..................................... 368
Rear Axle
............................................. 369
Front Axle
............................................ 370
Headlamp Aiming
................................. 371
Bulb Replacement
................................ 371
Windshield Replacement
....................... 377
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
..................................... 377
Tires
..................................................... 380
Appearance Care
.................................. 423
Vehicle Identification
............................. 433
Electrical System
.................................. 434
Capacities and Specifications
................ 445
Maintenance Schedule
.............................. 447
Maintenance Schedule
.......................... 448
Customer Assistance Information
............. 465
Customer Assistance and Information
..... 466
Reporting Safety Defects
...................... 479
Index
.......................................................... 483
2
Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab
9-7X, 9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registered
trademarks of Saab Automobile, AB.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Saab Automobile, AB whenever it appears in
this manual.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15863676 A First Printing
©
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,” “Do
Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
4
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Power Seats ................................................. 9
Power Lumbar .............................................. 9
Heated Seats .............................................. 10
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 11
Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 13
Head Restraints .......................................... 15
Rear Seats .................................................... 16
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16
Safety Belts .................................................. 18
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18
Questions and Answers
About Safety Belts ................................... 22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23
Driver Position ............................................. 24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 31
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 32
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 35
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 37
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 37
Child Restraints ............................................ 38
Older Children ............................................. 38
Infants and Young Children ......................... 40
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 44
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 48
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 50
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ...................... 57
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ....................... 59
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ......................... 60
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
7
Airbag System .............................................. 64
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 67
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 72
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 73
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81
Restraint System Check ............................... 82
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 83
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
8
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of
the seat cushions.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the horizontal control forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the horizontal
control up or down.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal
control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire horizontal control up or down.
Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 13.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle has power lumbar on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seats.
The seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat
cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
9
Heated Seats
Your vehicle has heated
front seats. The buttons
used to control this
feature are located on
the front door armrests.
The engine must be
running for the heated
seat feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal
button with the heated seat and seatback
symbol. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the heated seat off.
The indicator lights above the button will come on to
designate the level of heat selected: three for high,
two for medium, and one for low. The low setting
warms the seatback and seat cushion until the seat
temperature is near body temperature. The medium
and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You
will be able to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button
with the heated seatback symbol. An indicator
light on the button will come on to designate that
only the seatback is being heated. Additional
presses will cycle through the heat levels for the
seatback only.
The feature will shut off automatically when the
ignition is turned off.
10
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
The controls for the
memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seating position,
both outside mirror positions, and the adjustable
pedals, if equipped. The settings for these features
can be saved for up to two drivers.
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 110 for more information.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver,
follow the preceding steps, but press the other
numbered memory control button.
11
To recall the memory settings, do one of the
following:
Press and release button 1 or 2 while the
vehicle is in PARK (P). A single chime
will sound and the memory position will be
recalled.
If programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), pressing the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter will recall the preset
driver’s memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable
pedals position.
If programmed to do so through the DIC,
placing the key in the ignition will recall
the driver’s memory seat, mirrors, and
adjustable pedals positions.
See “Seat Recall” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 205 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat
feature at any time, press one of the memory
buttons or power seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for the easy exit seat function is located
on the driver’s door below the memory
buttons 1 and 2. The easy exit seat button is used
to program and recall the desired driver’s seat
position when exiting or entering the vehicle. The
mirrors, power lumbar, recline, and adjustable
pedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored or
recalled when using the easy exit seat function.
The seat position can be saved for up to two
drivers.
To store the easy exit seat position, do the
following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the
memory control for less than three seconds.
The seat will move to the stored memory
position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for
more than three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored for the selected button 1 or 2.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver,
follow the preceding steps, but press the other
numbered memory control button.
12
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
Press the easy exit seat button on the
memory control while the vehicle is in
PARK (P). The seat will move to the stored
exit position.
Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in
the Driver Information Center (DIC), removing
the key from the ignition will move the seat
to the exit position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 205 for
more information on activating this feature in
the DIC.
If an easy exit seat position has not been stored,
the default position is all the way rearward.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining
seatbacks. Use the
vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the
seat to operate them.
To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
To raise the seatback, press the control toward
the front of the vehicle.
13
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
14
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the seatback, and push the
head restraint down.
15
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats
which provide additional cargo space.
To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:
1. Pull up on the loop located where the seat
cushion meets the seatback and flip the
seat cushion forward.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever,
located on the
outboard side of
the seatback,
and fold the
seatback forward.
The head restraint will automatically fold out
of the way as the seatback is folded down.
16
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do
the following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright
position. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
2. Return the head restraints to the upright
position by reaching behind the seat and
pulling it forward until it locks into place. Push
and pull on the head restraint to make sure
that it is locked.
3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.
17
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 177 and Passenger
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 177.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
18
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would
not survive. But most crashes are in between. In
many of them, people who buckle up can survive
and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could
have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
19
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
20
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
21
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered for sale
has required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have
to buckle up to get the most protection. That is
true not only in frontal collisions, but especially
in side and other collisions.
22
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident even one that is not your
fault you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older
Children on page 38 or Infants and Young Children
on page 40. Follow those rules for everyone’s
protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
23
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
24
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
25
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
26
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your dealer
to fix it.
30
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
31
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 24.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
32
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
33
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install the
comfort guide to the shoulder belt:
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.
35
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 32. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
36
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take them
out of the guide. Slide the guide back onto its
storage clip located between the interior body
and the seatback.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal or side crash or a rollover if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably
other new parts for your safety belt system. See
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on
page 83.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
37
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
38
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 35. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts
provide.
39
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in this way, in a crash the child might slide
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
under the belt. The belt’s force would then
be applied right on the child’s abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the
United States and in every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be restrained while in
a vehicle.
40
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children
ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate restraints.
Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult
safety belts alone, unless there is no other
choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much until a crash.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
41
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available.
42
When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants always should be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
43
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
44
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
45
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system
is a portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in the
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child
restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be used in
a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50 for
more information. A child can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
46
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,
and to this manual. The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the
child within the child restraint. One system,
the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.
A shield may take the place of hip straps. A
T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
47
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
48
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off. Here
is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle even
when no child is in it.
49
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the child restraint.
A child restraint must never be installed using only
the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments. The following
explains how to attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate
a child restraint with lower attachments (B).
50
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on
the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a top tether.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
51
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has two
labels, near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
The labels are located above a flap, at the base of
the seatback, in the rear outside seating positions.
The anchors are located under the flap. In order to
get to the anchors you will need to pull the strap at
the center of the seat where the seat cushion meets
the seatback. This will allow you to fold the seat
cushion up and out of the way. Lift the flap to
expose the anchors and then lower the seat
cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked into place.
Second Row
52
The top tether anchors for each rear seating
position are located on the floor in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Do not use the rear tie-down brackets
near the liftgate for top tethers. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint will be
placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position, if a national or local
law requires that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 48 for additional information.
53
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
54
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has
been installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that there
is no contact between the child restraint or the
LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt
or the seat. When removing the child restraint,
always remember to return the safety belts to
their normal, stowed position before folding the
rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and
the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seat
where the seat cushion meets the
seatback. This will allow you to fold the
seat cushion up and out of the way. Lift
the flap to expose the anchors and then
lower the seat cushion. See Rear Seat
Operation on page 16 for additional
information. Be sure the cushion is
locked into place.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
55
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint
to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if your vehicle has one. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions. If your vehicle has a
cargo shade, route the top tether
between the seatback and the cargo
shade.
Fold down the head
restraint and route the
single tether under the
head restraint and in
between the head
restraint posts. See
Rear Seat Operation
on page 16.
Fold down the head
restraint and route the
dual tether around
the head restraint. See
Rear Seat Operation
on page 16.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
56
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 50.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
57
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
58
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back
all the way. The safety belt will move freely again
and be ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
secured in the center rear seat, although some
of them will fit there. If the center seat position is
too narrow for your child restraint, secure it in
a rear outside seat position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat
position, follow the instructions in Securing a Child
Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position on
page 57.
59
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A
rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 48.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 74 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 179 for more information on this including
important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
60
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 9.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 50.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50 if
the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 74. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Power Seats on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit when
you turn the ignition to RUN or START. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 179.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
61
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
62
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You
should not be able to pull more of the belt from
the retractor once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will come
on and stay on when the key is turned to
RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
63
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle also has roof-mounted side impact
airbags designed for either side impact or rollover
deployment. Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
available for the driver and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver and for the right front
passenger and the passenger seated directly
behind that passenger.
Even if you have no right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag
in the right side of the instrument panel. Do
not place cargo in front of this airbag.
{CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In
a crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag
would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 67 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
64
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy
in moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal or in rear crashes. The
rollover capable airbags have been
designed to deploy the roof-mounted side
impact airbags in the event of a vehicle
rollover.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
65
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to
an inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly
in your vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 38 or Infants and Young
Children on page 40.
66
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 178 for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
67
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver
is in the ceiling above the side windows.
68
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger is in the ceiling above the
side windows.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between
an occupant and an airbag, and do not
attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering. And, because your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path
of an inflating side impact airbag will be
blocked. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear.
69
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe
frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
70
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which
enables the sensing system to monitor the position
of the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’s
seat. Seat position sensors provide information
that is used to determine if the airbags should
deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags
and a rollover sensor. See Airbag System on
page 64. These “rollover capable” airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes or during a rollover. A roof-mounted side
impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Roof-mounted side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted side impact
airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle
is struck or during a rollover.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
See Off-Road Driving on page 281.
71
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollover
capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, the
sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to
roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, and
related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger. For
vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags, the
airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbags are
located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate
to severe side collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags
supplement the protection provided by safety belts.
Airbags distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rollover
airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe side
collisions or rollovers for vehicles with roof-mounted
rollover airbags.
72
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbags may
still be at least partially inflated minutes after the
vehicle comes to rest. Some components of the
airbag module the steering wheel hub for the
driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, and the area along the
ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows
for vehicles with roof–mounted side impact
airbags may be hot for a short time. The parts
of the airbag that come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
flash the hazard warning flashers when the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn off the hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for those features.
73
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 473.
Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work properly. See
your dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. A passenger
airbag status indicator in the rearview mirror will be
visible when you turn your ignition key to START
or RUN.
United States
Canada
74
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON
or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 179.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child
riding in a booster seat.
75
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
a label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
76
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off. Here
is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
77
The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the rearview mirror will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position on page 60.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the right
front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could
be because that person is not sitting properly in
the seat.
78
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes. This
will allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 178 for more on this, including
important safety information.
79
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers,
can affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using
seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 81 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. You do not want the
system to inflate while someone is working on your
vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 480.
80
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front
end or side sheet metal, they may keep the
airbag system from working properly. Also, the
airbag system may not work properly if you
relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have
any questions about this, you should contact
Customer Assistance before you modify your
vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 466.
81
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, the inside review mirror,
ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,
roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag
system. If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 466.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt
system parts. If you see anything that might keep
a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care
of Safety Belts on page 427 for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If
a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
82
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or
the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling
near the side windows, the airbag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag
module and ceiling covering for roof-mounted
rollover airbags. Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash, then
you need new parts.
83
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need
to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat
parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH
system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace
airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag
system earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 178.
84
Keys .............................................................. 87
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation .................................... 90
Doors and Locks .......................................... 92
Door Locks ................................................. 92
Power Door Locks ....................................... 93
Delayed Locking .......................................... 94
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 94
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 97
Lockout Protection ....................................... 97
Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 98
Windows ....................................................... 99
Power Windows ........................................ 100
Sun Visors ................................................ 101
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 101
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 102
PASS-Key
®
III ........................................... 103
PASS-Key
®
III Operation ........................... 104
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 106
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 106
Ignition Positions ....................................... 107
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 108
Starting the Engine .................................... 108
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 110
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 110
Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 112
Parking Brake ........................................... 116
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 117
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 118
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 118
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 119
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 120
Mirrors ......................................................... 121
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar
®
and Compass ................... 121
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass ........................................ 123
Outside Power Mirror ................................ 123
Section 2 Features and Controls
85
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 124
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 124
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 124
OnStar
®
System .......................................... 125
Universal Home Remote System ................ 128
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 128
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 129
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 130
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 135
Storage Areas ............................................. 139
Glove Box ................................................. 139
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 139
Overhead Console ..................................... 140
Center Console Storage Area .................... 140
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 141
Rear Floor Storage Lid .............................. 142
Cargo Cover ............................................. 142
Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 143
Moonroof ..................................................... 144
Section 2 Features and Controls
86
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
87
This vehicle has
double-sided keys that
can be used for the
ignition and door lock.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys
and a key code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep
this number in a safe place. If you lose your
keys, you will be able to have new ones made
easily using this number. Your selling dealer
should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 469.
The key cannot be removed from the ignition if
your vehicle does not have power. See Ignition
Positions on page 107 for additional information.
88
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating
range. This is normal for any RKE system.
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter
to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 90.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
With this system you can lock and unlock your
doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle. The remote keyless
entry transmitter buttons will not operate when the
key is in the ignition.
K(Unlock): Press the
unlock button to
automatically unlock the
driver’s door. The
parking lamps may flash
and the interior lights
will go on. Press
the unlock button again
and all remaining
doors will unlock.
You can program different feedback settings
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more information see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 194
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. Press the lock button again within
three seconds and the horn may chirp.
L(Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol to
make the horn sound. The headlamps and
taillamps will also flash for up to 30 seconds. This
can be turned off by pressing the horn button
again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting
the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your
dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer.
When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the
lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each
vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
90
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
two years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message when
the transmitter battery is low. See “KEY FOB #
BATTERY LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 199
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the
remote keyless entry cover and gently pry the
transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Assemble the transmitter and replace the
screw.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
91
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
92
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle. From the outside, use the remote keyless
entry transmitter or the key.
From the inside, slide
the manual lever
forward or rearward.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located
on the driver’s and
front passenger’s
door armrests.
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.
To unlock the doors, press the other side of
the switch.
93
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and
the liftgate when using the power lock or the
remote keyless entry system.
The first press of the power door lock switch or
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
with the driver’s door open will activate the
delay locking. A chime will sound. All doors and
the liftgate can be reopened for up to five seconds
from the time the last door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the
doors will lock. You can lock the doors
immediately by using the power door lock switch
or by pressing the lock button on the optional
remote keyless entry transmitter a second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will
not lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on
page 97.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off.
If the feature is turned off, the doors will lock
immediately when a power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry transmitter lock button
is pressed.
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do
the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on
the driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter
unlock button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now
be off. If the feature was off, it will now be on.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
lock/unlock feature which enables you to program
your vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), or by the following method. See
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 205.
94
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is
shifted out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at
the factory to lock all the doors when the
transmission is shifted into gear. The following
instructions detail how to program your door
locks differently than the factory setting. Choose
one of the two programming options listed
previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,
with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,
you will hear the lock switch lock and
unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the two programming
options listed previously, and press the lock
side of the power door lock switch to
cycle through the lock options. You will have
30 seconds to begin programming. If you
exceed the 30-second limit, the locks
will automatically lock and unlock and the
horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to
re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by
turning the ignition to RUN. The locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will
chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving
the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches are
not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
95
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the
transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is
removed from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at
the factory to unlock all doors once the
transmission is shifted to PARK (P). The following
instructions detail how to program your door
locks differently than the factory setting. Choose
one of the four programming options listed
previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,
with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,
you will hear the lock switch lock and
unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the four programming
options listed above, and press the unlock side
of the power door lock switch to cycle through
the unlocking options. You will have
30 seconds to begin programming. If you
exceed the 30-second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will
chirp twice to indicate that you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically
lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to
indicate that you are leaving the program mode.
If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in
the programming mode, the current auto lock/
unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
96
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock
the rear doors so they cannot be opened from
the inside by passengers. To use one of
these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
security lock lever located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
2. Move the lever
down to engage
the security
lock. Move the lever
up to disengage
the security lock.
3. Close the door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened
from the inside while this feature is in use. If
you want to open the rear door while the security
lock is on, unlock the door and open the door
from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from
locking when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open to protect you from locking your key in
the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
97
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate or liftglass open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or
liftglass:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle. See
“Climate Control System” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 119.
Liftgate Release
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock
switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 90. The liftglass will also unlock
when the liftgate is unlocked.
Press the button on the liftglass to open it.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located
in the center of the liftgate. When the liftgate
is opened, the liftglass will lock after a short delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of
the liftgate in the center, to expose the access
hole in the trim panel.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in
the trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock
position. Pry the right release lever up to
unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
98
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
99
Power Windows
The controls for the power windows are located on
the armrest on each of the side doors. With power
windows, the switches operate the windows when
the ignition is in RUN, ACC or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 108. The driver’s
door also has a switch for each of the passenger’s
windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the
window and pull up on the switch to raise
the window. If you hold the switch down for
three to seven seconds after the window has been
completely lowered or raised, the window will
not operate for about 15 seconds.
Express-Down Window
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an
express-down feature that allows you to lower the
window without holding the switch down. Press
down briefly on the driver’s or front passenger’s
window switch labeled AUTO to activate the
express-down feature. Lightly tap the switch to
open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing
the top of the switch.
100
Window Lockout
o
(Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent passengers from operating
the power windows. The lockout switch is located
in front of the window switches on the driver’s
door. A light in the lockout switch will come on to
show that the switch has been activated. Press
the lockout switch again to return to normal
operation.
Sun Visors
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun
visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from
the center mount and slide it along the rod from
side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger side of
the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side to
cover the side window. It can also be moved along
the rod from side-to-side in this position.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and
Pull-out Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun
visor down to block glare. Pull the sun visor
extender out for additional coverage. Detach the
sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the
side to cover the side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to
turn on the lamps. The lamps will turn off when
the cover is closed.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
101
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped
with a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Here is how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The
security light should flash.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn
off after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm
is not armed until the security light turns off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go
off. The headlamps and parking lamps will flash
for two minutes, and the horn will sound for
30 seconds, then will turn off to save the
battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not
activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the
manual door lock. It activates only if you use a
power door lock switch with the door open, or with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. You should
also remember that you can start your vehicle with
the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
If you do not want to activate the
theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be
locked with the door key after the doors
are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the
remote keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking
a door any other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any
door with the key. You can also turn off the alarm
by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm will not stop if you try
to unlock a door any other way.
102
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with
the power door lock switch while the door is
open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait
for the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock
switch is not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by
your dealer.
PASS-Key
®
III
Your PASS-Key
®
III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key
®
III uses a radio frequency transponder
in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
103
PASS-Key
®
III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key
®
III
(Personalized
Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key
®
III
is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This means you do not have to do anything different
to arm or disarm the system. It works when you
insert or remove the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key
®
III system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the
vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will
not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the
engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to
start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the
high number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the SECURITY light comes on, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.
At this time, you may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435.Ifthe
engine still does not start with the other key, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your dealer who can
service the PASS-Key
®
III to have a new key made.
104
It is possible for the PASS-Key
®
III decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. This procedure
is for programming additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your
keys, only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key
®
III
to have new keys made. To program additional
keys you will require two current driver’s keys. You
must add a step to the following procedure.
After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the second
current driver’s key. Then continue with Step 3.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key
has been programmed. It may not be apparent
that the SECURITY light went on due to
how quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light
comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key
®
III
system, however, is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not
protected by the PASS-Key
®
III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key
®
III key, see
your dealer to have a new key made.
105
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new linings can
mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 305 for the
trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
106
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
The ignition switch
is located on the
center console.
9 (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove the key when the ignition
is turned to LOCK and the vehicle has power.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
ACC (Accessory): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in
the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do
not operate your vehicle in the accessory
ignition position for a long period of time.
R (RUN): This is the position for driving.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACC or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
107
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain
features of your vehicle to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, DVD player, sunroof
(option) and overhead console will work when
the ignition key is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will
continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until
a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
108
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or 18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
109
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This
feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the
pedals cannot move farther away from the standard
position, but can move closer for better pedal reach.
If your vehicle has this feature, it can be
programmed to work with the memory function. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 11.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
The switch used
to adjust the pedals
is located on the
steering column.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer or farther away from you.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (18°C) as noted on the cord.
110
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment next to the
battery box facing the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some
other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,
we ask that you contact your dealer in the area
where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer
can give you the best advice for that particular area.
111
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 117.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 305.
112
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and move the shift lever
into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on
page 118.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
113
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 280.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing
a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must first
press the large button on the shift handle.
While the button is pressed, move the shifter in
the THIRD (3) position.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your
brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
114
To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must first
press the large button on the shift handle. While
the button is pressed, move the shifter in the
SECOND (2) position.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the
vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transmission will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must first
press the large button on the shift handle.
While the button is pressed, move the shifter in
the FIRST (1) position.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. The repair will not be covered by
your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin
the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
115
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your foot and pull up on the
parking brake lever located between the seats.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 183.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all
the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.
116
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing
the button on the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),
hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pressing the button on the console shift
lever. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
117
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly
before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,
see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 117.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply
the regular brakes first and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 112.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
118
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
119
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 119.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 291.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 117.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 305.
120
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar
®
and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming
rearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar
®
system.
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar
®
system. See your dealer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar
®
.
See OnStar
®
System on page 125 for more
information about the services OnStar
®
provides.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the
following:
1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
and hold the on/off button until the light
comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button until
the indicator light turns off.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the
upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass
displays a maximum of two characters. For
example, “NE” is displayed for north-east.
121
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button to activate the
compass calibration mode. CAL will be displayed
in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance if
you live outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account
for compass variance, your compass could give
false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for
six seconds. Release the button when
(FOR ZONE) is displayed. The number shown
is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the window on the mirror by pressing the on/off
button. Once you find your zone number,
release the button. After about four seconds,
the mirror will return to the compass display,
and the new zone number will be set.
122
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror with a compass.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for the
automatic dimming feature and compass.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar
®
and Compass on page 121 for information
on mirror operation.
Outside Power Mirror
The outside power
mirror control is located
on the driver’s door.
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire
to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want
the mirror to go.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so that
you can see the side of your vehicle and the
area behind your vehicle.
4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control
to the center position so the mirror cannot
be moved.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position
in any direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting
mode. This action is harmless. It is a warning that
the mirror can go no further. To stop this action,
back the mirror up by moving the control in
the opposite direction.
Fold the mirror in manually before entering a car
wash. To do this, pull the mirror in toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror back out when finished.
123
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The passenger’s outside mirror will adjust
to a preset tilt position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) gear. Curb view assist may
be useful when you are parallel parking. The
mirror will return to normal position when
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear.
Automatic mirror movement in either direction
will follow a short delay.
You can turn this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 205.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right or left lane, you could hit a
vehicle. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s outside mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can
be seen from the driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, a
defogger also warms the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside rearview mirrors to help clear
them of ice, snow and condensation.
124
OnStar
®
System
OnStar
®
uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar
®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar
®
at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar
®
button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar
®
service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar
®
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar
®
service at any time by contacting
OnStar
®
as provided below. A complete OnStar
®
Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
®
Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
®
Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar
®
at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)
or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar
®
button to speak with an OnStar
®
advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar
®
features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar
®
services and system
limitations, see the OnStar
®
Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar
®
Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar
®
, the Safe
& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections
®
Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the first
year, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections
®
Plan. For more information, press the OnStar
®
button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar
®
services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar
®
.
125
Available Services with Safe & Sound
®
Plan
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar
®
Vehicle Diagnostics
Remote Diagnostics
OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling with 30
complimentary minutes
OnStar
®
Virtual Advisor
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections
®
Plan
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar
®
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling
OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar
®
subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with
OnStar
®
Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free
Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan, depending on eligibility. To find out
more, refer to the OnStar
®
Owner’s Guide in the
vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
®
advisor
by pressing the OnStar
®
button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
126
OnStar
®
Virtual Advisor
OnStar
®
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access location-based weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar
®
Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar
®
Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar
®
Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 259 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar
®
Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar
®
Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar
®
services, your
vehicle’s OnStar
®
system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar
®
Call
Center at the time of an OnStar
®
button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a
crash, additional information regarding the accident
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the
direction from which your vehicle was hit). When
you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
®
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends
OnStar
®
your GPS location so that we can provide
you with location-based services.
OnStar
®
service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar
®
has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar
®
service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar
®
has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar
®
service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
127
OnStar
®
service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar
®
equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar
®
cannot control that may prevent
OnStar
®
from providing OnStar
®
service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar
®
advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar
®
buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar
®
button to confirm that your
OnStar
®
equipment is active.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
128
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTE05A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
129
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote
System buttons, follow the instructions below.
If there is one triangular LED above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
130
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
Programming Universal Home
Remote Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
131
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and one-half
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
Universal Home Remote System. Push
one button for each switch as follows:
Left button = “on” switch position.
Right button = “off” switch position.
Middle button = “middle” switch position.
Example of Switch Settings Example
132
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. You may need to
hold the button from five to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing
a different function button in Step 7 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
133
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
After pressing the “learn” button, you have
10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to
the owner’s guide for your garage door opener.
3. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
134
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for about 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 468.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with three round LED).
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the
stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured before April 1,
1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow
Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
135
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Assistance Offices on page 468.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be
installed in your hand-held transmitter for
quicker and more accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
136
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to
complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door opener.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release it.
Immediately press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds, then
release it. Immediately, press and hold the
same button a third time for two seconds,
then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
137
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
138
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 468.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the handle to the
left. Use the key to lock and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has a
cupholder on the
instrument panel next to
the radio.
To open the cupholder, push once on the support
and the cupholder will move into position for
use. To close the cupholder, lift the support up
towards the instrument panel.
A cupholder is located on the front of the center
console and two more are located at the rear
of the center console. To use the rear cupholders,
pull down on the lid.
139
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a Universal
Home Remote, and a moonroof switch. See
the following for more information:
Reading Lamps on page 164.
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) on page 128 or
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) on page 129.
Moonroof on page 144.
Center Console Storage Area
Grasp the front lever on the center console while
lifting the top to open it.
The console may contain one or more of the
following components:
Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear Seat
Audio (RSA) on page 257 for more
information.
Rear Climate Control. See Rear Climate
Control System on page 173 for more
information.
Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 166 for more
information.
Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on
page 107.
If your vehicle has the center armrest
compartment, lift the cover by pulling up on the
latch handle located underneath the front edge of
the armrest.
140
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggage
carrier that allows you to load things on top of your
vehicle. The luggage carrier, if equipped, has
side rails attached to the roof, and places to use
for tying things down. These let you load some
other things on top of your vehicle, as long as they
are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that
it rests on the slats as far forward as
possible and against the side rails, making
sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 296.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are
driving, check now and then to make sure
the luggage carrier is locked and cargo is still
securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for reduced
wind noise. Place one crossrail at the rear
most point of the vehicle and the other crossrail
above the opening of the rear door.
141
Rear Floor Storage Lid
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
secure any such item properly.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a
removable storage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the
following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch
handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the
forward mounting slots.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by
applying slight pressure to the latch until you hear
it click.
Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim
panel located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch
the posts into the sockets on the inside of the
vehicle to secure it.
142
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and
carefully roll it back up.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other
endcap so that you can remove the shade
from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or sudden maneuver. You or others could
be injured. If you remove the cover, always
store it in the proper storage location.
When you put it back, always be sure that it
is securely reattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
There may be cargo
tie downs in the rear
of your vehicle that
allow you to strap
cargo in and keep it
from moving.
143
Moonroof
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
moonroof. The ignition must be turned to RUN,
ACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active to operate it. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 108.
The moonroof switch
is located in the
overhead console.
Press and release the back of the button to open
the moonroof. Press and hold the front of the
button to close the moonroof.
With the moonroof closed, press the front of the
button to open the moonroof to the vent position.
The moonroof has a sunshade which can be
pulled forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade
is in the closed position, it will open when the
moonroof is opened.
144
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150
Other Warning Devices ............................. 150
Horn .......................................................... 150
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 151
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 151
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 153
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 154
Windshield Washer .................................... 155
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 155
Headlamp Washer ..................................... 156
Cruise Control ........................................... 156
Headlamps ................................................ 160
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 160
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 161
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 161
Fog Lamps ................................................ 162
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 163
Dome Lamps ............................................. 163
Dome Lamp Override ................................ 163
Entry Lighting ............................................ 164
Exit Lighting .............................................. 164
Reading Lamps ......................................... 164
Electric Power Management ...................... 164
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 165
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 166
Climate Controls ......................................... 167
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 167
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 172
Rear Climate Control System .................... 173
Climate Controls Personalization ................ 173
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 174
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 175
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 176
Trip Odometer ........................................... 176
Tachometer ............................................... 176
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 177
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 177
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 178
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 179
Charging System Light .............................. 182
Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 182
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 183
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 184
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light ........................... 185
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light ......................... 185
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 186
Section 3 Instrument Panel
145
Tire Pressure Light .................................... 186
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 187
Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 190
Security Light ............................................ 191
Cruise Control Light .................................. 191
Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 191
Highbeam On Light ................................... 192
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .................... 192
Check Gages Warning Light ...................... 192
Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 193
Fuel Gage ................................................. 193
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 194
Check Gas Cap Light ................................ 194
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 194
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 195
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 199
DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 205
Audio System(s) ......................................... 212
Setting the Time ........................................ 213
Radio with CD ........................................... 214
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 222
Using an MP3 ........................................... 233
XM Radio Messages ................................. 239
Navigation/Radio System ........................... 243
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 243
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 257
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 258
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 259
Radio Reception ........................................ 260
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 261
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 261
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 261
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 261
Section 3 Instrument Panel
146
NOTES
147
Instrument Panel Overview
148
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 172.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 259.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 150.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 175.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See
Windshield Wipers on page 154.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver
Information Center Buttons. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 150 or Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 194.
H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 155.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 163.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 329.
K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 163.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 212.
M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 167.
N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 112.
O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on
page 107.
P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 116.
Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 166.
R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 139.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 139.
149
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
150
Tilt Wheel
The steering wheel should be adjusted before
you drive.
The tilt lever is located
to the left of the steering
column, under the
turn signal lever.
It can be raised to the highest level to give
your legs more room when you enter and exit
the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel
to a comfortable level, then release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.
O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 160.
23 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 153.
Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 153.
- Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 162.
I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 156.
151
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
let you signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
returns automatically.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever returns
by itself when released. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors might also have lane change
indicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
bulb could be burned out and other drivers will not
see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
you signal a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 435 and check for
burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added
wiring for the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal
indicator flashes even if a turn signal bulb is
burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal
lamps regularly to make sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash of
the turn signal. To turn off the chime, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
152
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high
beam, push the lever toward the instrument panel.
To return to low-beam headlamps, pull the
multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator light
on the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps
are in the automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,
then release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or
on low beam, the high-beam headlamps turn
on. They will stay on as long as you hold the lever
toward you. The high-beam indicator on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Release the
lever to return to normal operation.
153
Windshield Wipers
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for
a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its
original position. For more cycles, hold the
lever down before releasing it.
9(Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
&(Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment
band to set the length of the delay.
x(Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the
delay feature. The closer you move the band
toward mist, the longer the delay. The windshield
wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position
for slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position
for rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about
six seconds while you are driving, the exterior
lamps will come on automatically if the exterior
lamp control is in AUTO.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the
blades do become damaged, install new blades or
blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 377.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
154
Windshield Washer
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid
on the windshield, press the windshield washer
paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
This control is located to
the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to
either 1, 2, or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the
control to 1 or 2. For steady wiping, turn the control
to 3. To turn the wiper off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer
symbol located in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear
window washer will run out of fluid before the
windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield
but not your rear window, check the fluid level.
155
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlamp
washer system. The headlamp washers clear
debris from the headlamp lenses by soaking the
lens with fluid, waiting for about five seconds, then
rinsing the loose debris from the lenses.
The headlamp washers are located under the
headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for
one wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front
windshield washer button is pressed for the first
time after your vehicle is turned on. The headlamps
washers then activate automatically for one cycle
after every four front windshield washes.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
washed. See Windshield Washer on page 155
for more information.
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
R(On): This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this
symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume
to a previously set speed.
T(Set): Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
156
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Some vehicles have a
cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that will come on
when the cruise control
is engaged.
157
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. But you do
not need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch
briefly from on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the
switch or apply the brake. So unless you want
to go faster, do not hold the switch at
resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed. If the accelerator pedal is
held longer than 60 seconds, cruise control
will turn off.
Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Press in the button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press the set button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
158
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may
want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain
your speed. When going downhill, you may
have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find
this to be too much trouble and do not use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the
following:
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak
®
feature,
cruise control will turn off if road conditions
cause StabiliTrak
®
to activate.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak
®
system
activate, if your vehicle is equipped with either
feature.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
159
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following
four positions:
O(On/Off): Turn the control to this position to
turn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and Automatic Headlamps. Turning the control to
this position again turns the automatic lighting
system back on. This feature is not available for
vehicles first sold in Canada.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on
and off depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, if the
driver’s door is open and the ignition is in LOCK
or ACC. To turn the tone off, turn the knob all
the way counterclockwise.
In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off
once the ignition key is in LOCK.
160
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL will activate when the following
conditions are met:
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps or
headlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equipped
with the High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting
system option, the DRL system will turn on your
turn signal lamps. If your vehicle is not equipped
with HID, the DRL system will turn on your
headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The
instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular
headlamps.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the Automatic
Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when
the vehicle is started and after the transaxle
has been shifted out of the PARK (P) position.
The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and parking
lamps will come on. The instrument panel lights
and radio lights will also turn on at normal
brightness. Once on, the system remains on
during these conditions even if the vehicle
is shifted back into PARK (P).
The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered
or the system may come on whenever the
ignition is on and the vehicle is shifted out of the
PARK (P) position.
The system could also turn on the lamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
161
There is a delay in the transition between the
daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp
systems, so that driving under bridges or bright
overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only
affected when the light sensor sees a change in
lighting lasting longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on after the
transmission is shifted out of PARK (P). Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to
DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster might not be as bright as
usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position.
If the vehicle is running and the automatic
headlamp system is already on, it can be turned
off by turning and releasing the headlamp
control at the off position. The automatic headlamp
system stays off until you turn and release the
headlamp control at the off position again.
See Headlamps on page 160.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the
fog lamps on and off.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking
lamps also turn on. A message will also display on
the DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 194.
To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog
lamp band on the lever up to the dot and
release it. The band will return to its original
position.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the
fog lamps will turn off. They will turn back on
again when you switch back to low-beam
headlamps.
When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a
message will appear on the Driver Information
Center. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 199.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
162
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn the knob to adjust
the instrument panel
lights. Turn the
knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to
brighten or dim
the interior lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will automatically come on when
you open a door, unless the dome lamp override
button is pressed in.
You can also turn on the dome lamps by turning the
instrument panel brightness control all the way
clockwise to the detent position. In this position, the
dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override
button is located to the
left of the steering
column on the
instrument panel.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button.
The dome lamps will remain off when a door is
open. This will override the illuminated entry
feature unless you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
the button again. The dome lamps will come
on when you open any door.
163
Entry Lighting
The vehicle has entry lighting.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps come
on as long as the dome override lamp override
button is not pressed in. When all the doors
are closed, the lamps stay on for a short period of
time and then turn off automatically. If you use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
to unlock the vehicle, the interior lamps come on
for a short time whether or not the dome lamp
override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
when you remove the key from the ignition. If
the dome override is off, these lights will stay on
for a short period of time and then will go out.
Reading Lamps
Press the indented part of the lenses on the
reading lamps located in the overhead console to
turn them on or off.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
164
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, and
vanity lamps if they are left on for more than
20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep
the battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the
interior lamps, it may be necessary to do one of
the following to return to normal operation:
Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps
and headlamps under most circumstances, if they
are left on. If you would like to turn them back
on, turn the exterior lamps knob.
165
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets.
There are two outlets located below the climate
controls and one outlet is on the rear of the center
floor console.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the
outlet. Be sure to put the cover back on when not
using the accessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer for
additional information on the accessory
power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
166
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. When your
vehicle is first started and the climate control
system is on, or if the climate control system has
been turned on, the display will show the
driver’s temperature setting for five seconds.
Then it will show the outside temperature.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire
climate control system. Outside air will still
enter the vehicle, and will be directed to the floor.
Press the AUTO button, the mode button, the
fan arrows, or either temperature knob to turn the
system on.
C(Mode): Press this button to manually select
the air delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel,
or windshield outlets. The system will stay in the
selected mode until the mode button is pressed
again or the AUTO button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing
toward the driver. This knob can also adjust
the passenger’s side temperature setting if the
two are linked.
167
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually
raise or lower the temperature on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. The display will show the
temperature setting decreasing or increasing and
an arrow pointing toward the passenger. The
passenger’s temperature setting can be set
to match and link to the driver’s temperature
setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button
for three seconds. When adjusting the driver’s
side temperature setting, the passenger’s
side temperature setting will follow and both
arrows will appear on the display. The passenger’s
side temperature setting also resets and relinks
to the driver’s side temperature setting if the
vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
Outside Air Temperature Display
A new outside temperature reading will be
displayed if the vehicle has been off for more than
three hours. If the vehicle has been off for less
than three hours, the old temperature reading may
be displayed because underhood heat is
affecting the true outside temperature. Underhood
heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take
several minutes of driving before the display
updates to the actual outside temperature.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation
is active, the system will control the inside
temperature, the air delivery mode, and the
fan speed.
168
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air outlet mode will be
automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor will run continuously when
the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be
set to outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet
will automatically switch to recirculate inside
air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F
(22°C) temperature setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to adjust. Turn the
driver’s or passenger’s side temperature
knob to adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If you choose the temperature
setting of 60°F (15°C), the system will remain
at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat
setting. Choosing either maximum setting may
not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any
faster.
Manual Operation
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
w9x(Fan): This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to
increase fan speed and the down arrow to
decrease fan speed. The display will change to
show you the selected fan speed and the driver’s
side temperature setting for five seconds.
C(Mode): Press this button to manually change
the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep
pressing the button until the desired mode appears
on the display. The display will change to show
you the selected air delivery mode and the driver’s
temperature setting for five seconds.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, then
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little
air is directed toward the windshield and the side
window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
169
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the
defroster and side window outlets. The recirculation
button cannot be selected in floor mode.
@(Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will
also come on to let you know that it is activated.
Recirculation mode is used to recirculate the
air inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to help
prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering
your vehicle or to help cool the air inside of
your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode can
be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
Defog and defrost modes are described later in
this section.
If recirculation mode is selected with floor,
defog, or defrost modes, the indicator will flash
three times and then turn off indicating the
selection is not available.
You may also notice that the air conditioning
compressor will run while in recirculation mode.
This is normal and will help to prevent fogging.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may
cause the windows to fog while using recirculation
mode. If the windows do start to fog, select
defog or defrost mode and increase fan speed.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared
when the engine is turned off.
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will
automatically begin to cool and dehumidify the air
inside of your vehicle. The air conditioning
symbol will appear on the display when the air
conditioning is on and will turn off when the
air conditioning is off.
170
If you turn the air conditioning off while in front
defrost or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol
will turn off, however, the A/C compressor will
remain on to help de-humidify the air inside
the vehicle. If one of the other modes is selected
the compressor will then turn the A/C off until
it is selected again or the AUTO button is pressed.
To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and
humid days at a temperature above freezing, press
the air conditioning button to run the A/C
compressor. Also it is best to avoid the use of the
recirculation mode except when maximum air
conditioning performance is needed or for short
times to avoid exterior odors.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air-conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of
moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be reduced if the climate control system
is used properly. You can use either defog or
front defrost to clear fog or frost from your
windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows
of fog or moisture. This setting will deliver air
to the floor and windshield outlets.
0(Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button
to clear the windshield and side windows of
frost or fog quickly. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from
AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is
40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air conditioning
compressor will automatically run to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
171
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let
you know that the rear window defogger is
activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the button is
pressed. If you need additional warming time,
press the button again.
The heated mirrors will also come on when you
press this button. See Outside Heated Mirrors on
page 124.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
sides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,
snow, or any other obstruction, such as
leaves. The heater and defroster will work far
better, reducing the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather,
select maximum blower speed for a few
moments before driving. This helps clear the
intake ducts of snow and moisture, and
reduces the chance of fogging the inside of
your window.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate
throughout your vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system. Check with your
dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.
172
Rear Climate Control System
The lower buttons on the rear seat audio are used
to adjust the rear seat climate controls. The
temperature of the air coming through the rear
outlets is determined by the front passenger’s
temperature setting.
z9y(Fan) Press this button to adjust the
fan speed.
z\y(Mode) Press this button to change the
direction of airflow in the rear seat area to
either vent, bi-level or floor mode.
P(On/Off) Press this button to turn the rear
climate controls on or off.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on
and not in defrost mode.
Climate Controls Personalization
Your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can store and recall the
climate control settings for temperature, air delivery
mode and fan speed for two different drivers.
The personal choice settings recalled are
determined by the transmitter used to enter the
vehicle. After the button with the unlock symbol on
a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed,
the climate control will adjust to the last settings of
the identified driver. The settings can also be
changed by pressing one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.
When adjustments are made, the new settings
are automatically saved for the driver.
173
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and
gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 194.
174
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you
will need to know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
175
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per
hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your
vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
The odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 195.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
176
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will sound for several seconds to remind
you buckle your safety belt. The driver safety belt
light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more.
You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled
and the vehicle
is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 74 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
177
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 64.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go out. This means the
system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
178
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
United States
Canada
179
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
180
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 74 for more on this,
including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 178.
181
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show you
it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it
stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the charging system.
It could indicate that you have problems with a
generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not running, but the ignition
is in RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
United States Canada
182
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage
may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to
higher reading. This is normal. Readings
between the low and high warning zones indicate
the normal operating range. The voltmeter
gage may also read lower when in fuel economy
mode. This is normal.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur
when a large number of electrical accessories are
operating in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period. This condition
is normal since the charging system is not able to
provide full power at engine idle. As engine
speeds are increased, this condition should correct
itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging
system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the
reading in either warning zone. If you must drive,
turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a
possible problem in the electrical system. Have
the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set your parking
brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake
does not release fully. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means your
vehicle has a brake problem. A chime may also
sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
United States Canada
183
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 302.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS),
this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may
stay on for several
seconds, that is normal.
A chime may also sound when the light comes on.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not on, you still have
brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, you
do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 183 earlier in this section.
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
184
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light
This light will come on
briefly when the engine
is started.
This light will come on if a problem is detected in
the StabiliTrak
®
system.
For more information see StabiliTrak
®
System on
page 271.
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
This warning light
should come on
briefly when the
engine is started.
During most driving conditions, this light will not
come on. If the StabiliTrak
®
System is actively
controlling the stability and/or traction of the
vehicle, this light will blink. This is normal.
This light will come on if any portion of the system
has been manually turned off or a problem is
detected in the system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Information Center, a message will appear also,
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199
and StabiliTrak
®
System on page 271 for
more information.
185
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area,
the engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 347.
Tire Pressure Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 199.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do
so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 380 for more information.
This light will flash for approximately 70 seconds
and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with
the Tire Pressure Monitor system.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 391
for more information.
United States Canada
186
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 322.
187
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
Light On Steady An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 326.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
188
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 324. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
189
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the
engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the low pressure zone indicate the normal
operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or other
problems causing low oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
United States Canada
190
Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the key toward START.
See PASS-Key
®
III Operation on page 104 for
additional information regarding the security light.
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
when the cruise control
is set.
See Cruise Control on page 156 for more
information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light comes on
when a noticeable
reduction in the
vehicle’s performance
occurs.
The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed
when the reduced engine power light is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
The performance may be reduced until the next
time you drive your vehicle. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as possible for
diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
system. If this happens, take the vehicle in for
service as soon as possible.
191
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 153.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
on the ignition, as a
check to show you it is
working.
The service all-wheel drive light comes on to
indicate that there may be a problem with the drive
system and service is required. Malfunctions
can be indicated by the system before any problem
is apparent, which may prevent serious damage
to the vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your dealer in correctly diagnosing a
malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light
will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are
driving, check your coolant temperature and
engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the
warning zones.
192
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on,
the liftgate or liftglass is
not completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the
liftgate or liftglass even partially open.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you
turn off the ignition.
United States Canada
193
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly
when you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.
See Fuel on page 324.
Check Gas Cap Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on if
your gas cap is not
securely fastened.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187 for
more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is
located on the instrument panel cluster, below the
speedometer. The DIC buttons are located on
the center of the instrument panel, above the radio.
The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer, fuel economy, customization features,
and warning/status messages.
r (Fuel Information): Press this button to
display the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel
economy, and engine oil life. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 195 for more information.
194
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to
display the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 195
for more information.
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 150 for more information.
q (Customization): Press this button to access
the vehicle settings menu and customize the
personal settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 205 for more information.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC
display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will
appear on the display. Pressing the trip stem
on the instrument panel cluster or any of the
DIC buttons will acknowledge any warning
or service messages.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing
the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
The DIC has different modes which can be
accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located
on the center of the instrument panel, above the
radio. These buttons are fuel information, trip
information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
195
Fuel Information Button
r
(Fuel Information): Press this button to scroll
through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel
economy, and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button
until RANGE appears on the display. This
mode shows the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It is based on fuel economy
and the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The display
will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel
range is an average of recent driving conditions.
As your driving conditions change, this data is
gradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode
shows the number of gallons or liters of fuel used
since the last reset of this menu item. To reset the
fuel used information, press and hold the select
button for one second while FUEL USED is
displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel
information button until AVG. ECON appears on the
display. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (MPG), kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second
while AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average
fuel economy. Average fuel economy will then be
calculated starting from that point. If the average
fuel economy is not reset, it will be continually
updated each time you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel
information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears
on the display. The engine oil life system shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will
show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 337.
196
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended
in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Engine Oil on page 334 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 450.
Trip Information Button
3
(Trip Information): Press this button to
scroll through the odometer, trip odometers, tire
pressures, and timer.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This
mode shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles or kilometers. Pressing
the trip stem located on the instrument panel
cluster with the vehicle off will also display
the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until
TRIP A appears on the display. This mode shows
the current distance traveled since the last
reset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button
until TRIP B appears on the display. This mode
shows the current distance traveled since the last
reset for TRIP B in either miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and
hold the select button for one second while in
one of the trip modes. This will reset the
information for TRIP A or TRIP B.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while
they are displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you
press and hold the trip stem or the select button
for more than four seconds, the display will
show the distance traveled since the last ignition
cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
197
Tire Pressures: Press the trip information button
until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display.
This mode shows the tire pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the select button to scroll through the following
information:
LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
driver’s side tire.
RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
passenger’s side tire.
LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
driver’s side tire.
RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
passenger’s side tire.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press
the select button while TIMER is displayed to start
the timer. The display will show the amount of
time that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted as long as
the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to
99 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59),
after which the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select
button briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the
select button while TIMER is displayed.
Customization Button
q
(Customization): Press this button to access
the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 205 for more information.
Select Button
r
(Select): Press the select button to reset
certain DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC display, and set your
customization settings. For example, this button
will allow you to reset the trip odometers, turn
off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and enables
you to scroll through and select the language
in which the DIC information will appear.
198
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear
one after another.
Some messages may not require immediate
action. Press any of the DIC buttons on the
instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem
on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them
from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
removed from the DIC display. Take any messages
that appear on the display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message displays when the engine oil needs
to be changed and service is required for your
vehicle. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450
and Engine Oil on page 334 for more information.
Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 337
for information on how to reset the message. This
message clears itself after 10 seconds until the
next ignition cycle.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the tire pressure in
one of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
Press any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to
acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
If this message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information Label. See Tires on page 380, Loading
Your Vehicle on page 296, and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 388. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 186.
199
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This message displays if the washer fluid level is
low. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer fluid reservoir clears this message. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 357. This
message clears itself after 10 seconds, or you can
press any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem,
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
This message displays when the passenger
outside rearview mirror moves into the curb view
position. See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
on page 124 for more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press any of
the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 347 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
cooling system temperature gets hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 347 for the proper course of
action. This message clears when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned
off. The message clears after 10 seconds. If you
turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
also turn off and this message appears on the DIC.
The fog lamps turn back on again when you switch
back to low-beam headlamps. See Fog Lamps on
page 162 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on
page 151 for more information.
200
FRONT FOG LAMPS ON
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned
on. The message clears after 10 seconds. See
Fog Lamps on page 162 and Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever on page 151 for more
information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
fuel level is low in the vehicle’s fuel tank. Refuel
as soon as possible. Press any of the DIC buttons,
or the trip stem, to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display. See Low
Fuel Warning Light on page 194, Filling the Tank
on page 326, and Fuel on page 324 for more
information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message may display if the outside
temperature reaches a level where ice could form
on the roadway. If the temperature rises to a
safe level, the message clears. This message
clears itself after 10 seconds, or you can press any
of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
This message displays if a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 90. Press any of the
DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,
and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press any of the
DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
201
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
Engine Oil on page 334 for more information.
This message displays if low oil pressure
levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check
the oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil on
page 334.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Press any of the DIC
buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is
in RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 98.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. Press any of the DIC buttons,
or the trip stem, to acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the
DIC. Press any of the DIC buttons, or the trip
stem, to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
202
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your dealer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 178 and Airbag System on page 64
for more information. Press any of the DIC
buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if a problem occurs with
the brake system. If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart
the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message is still displayed, or
appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service. See your dealer.
SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions,
the charging system light may also turn on in the
instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Light on page 182. The battery will not be charging
at an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability
to enter the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safe
to drive, however you should have the electrical
system checked by your dealer. Press any of the
DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If this message displays, it means there may be a
problem with the StabiliTrak
®
system. If this
message appears, try to reset the system by
performing the following: stop; turn off the engine;
then start the engine again. If this message still
comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe
to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of
StabiliTrak
®
, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly. Press any of the DIC buttons, or the
trip stem, to acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display.
203
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part on the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working
properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the
four sensors are missing or inoperable, the
warning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensor
would be missing, for example, if you put
different wheels on your vehicle without
transferring the sensors. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPM. See your dealer.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak
®
system activates to maintain vehicle stability.
Any combination of engine speed management,
brake traction control, and stability control displays
this message.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display if driving conditions
delay StabiliTrak
®
system initialization. This
is normal. Once the system initializes, this
message will no longer be displayed on the DIC.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when you press the
StabiliTrak
®
button for more than five seconds or
when stability control has been automatically
disabled. The StabiliTrak
®
button is located on the
transmission shift handle. To limit wheel spin
and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak
®
on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak
®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your
vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in
extreme off-road conditions and require more
wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295. To turn the
StabiliTrak
®
system back on, press the
StabiliTrak
®
button again.
The message may display if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 183.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions
that caused the message to be displayed are
no longer present.
204
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
This message may display and a chime may sound
if the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly.
Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank on
page 326. The diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. This message remains on until
it is acknowledged and cleared from the DIC display
by pressing any of the DIC buttons or the trip stem.
The DIC message is also cancelled if the ignition is
turned off.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon
light may come on again during a second trip if
the fuel cap is still not tightened properly. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187 for
more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when you momentarily
press the StabiliTrak
®
button located on the
transmission shift handle. In this mode, stability
control and the brake-traction control are
functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more
freely. For more details on this mode, see
StabiliTrak
®
System on page 271.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a
turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).
Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
position. Press any of the DIC buttons, or the
trip stem, to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program some features to
one setting based on your preference. All of the
customizable options listed may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available display
on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the customization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed from their default
state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the
ignition is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
205
Press the customization button to scroll through
the available customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS momentarily displays before going
to a customization option.
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK
DOORS: IN GEAR appears in the display.
To select your preference for automatic locking,
press the select button while LOCK DOORS:
IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following
choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will
lock when the vehicle speed is above
8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on automatic door locks, see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 94.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
DOORS: IN PARK appears in the display.
To select your preference for automatic unlocking,
press the select button while UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following
choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted
into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door
will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted
into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will
not be unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on automatic door locks, see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 94.
206
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK
FEEDBACK: BOTH appears in the display.
To select your preference for the feedback you
receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press the
select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button
with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press
the lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no
feedback when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps
will flash each time you press the button with
the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp
the second time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the RKE transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To
select your preference for the feedback you will
receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press the select
button while UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default):
The parking lamps will flash each time you
press the button with the unlock symbol on the
RKE transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will
chirp the second time you press the button with the
unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button
with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter and
the horn will chirp the second time you press
the unlock button.
207
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no
feedback when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To
select your preference for how long the headlamps
will stay on when you turn off the vehicle, press
the select button while HEADLAMP DELAY:
10 SEC is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following
choices:
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds)
(default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the
amount of time that the headlamps stay on after
you turn off the vehicle. If you choose OFF,
the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn off
the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select
your preference for perimeter lighting, press
the select button while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON
is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The
headlamps and back-up lamps will come on for
40 seconds, if it is dark enough outside, when you
unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights
will not come on when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
208
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT: OFF appears in the display. To select your
preference for seat position exit, press the
select button while EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will
move to the exit position when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on seat position exit,
see “Easy Exit Seat” under Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals on page 11.
Seat Recall
Press the customization button until SEAT
RECALL: OFF appears in the display. To select
your preference for recall of the driver’s memory
seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals, if your vehicle
has this feature, press the select button while
SEAT RECALL: OFF is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’s
memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
position you saved will only be recalled when the
memory button 1 or 2 is pressed.
SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’s
memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
position you saved will be recalled when you put
the key in the ignition.
209
SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’s
memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
position you saved will be recalled when
you unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. For
more information on the memory seat feature, see
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 11.
Curb View
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW:
OFF appears in the display. To select your
preference for curb view, press the select button
while CURB VIEW: OFF is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s
outside mirror will not be tilted down when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal
driving position, following a short delay.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on tilt mirror in reverse,
see Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 124.
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until ALARM
WARNING: BOTH appears in the display. To
select your preference for alarm warning, press the
select button while ALARM WARNING: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The
headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp
when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will
flash when the alarm is active.
210
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is
displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to
the next feature. For more information on
alarm warning type, see Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 102.
Language
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select
your preference for display language, press the
select button while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following languages:
ENGLISH (default)
FRANCAIS (French)
ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do
not want or understand, press and hold the
customization button and the trip information
button at the same time. The DIC will begin
scrolling through the languages in their particular
language. English will be in English, Francais
will be in French, and Espanol will be in Spanish.
When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then
display the information in the language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different
languages by pressing and holding the trip reset
stem for four seconds, as long as you are in
the odometer mode.
Units
Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select
English or metric, press the select button while
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)
UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
211
If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information will
be displayed in English units. For example,
distance will be displayed in miles (mi) and fuel
economy in miles per gallon (MPG). If METRIC
(km/L) is chosen, all information will be displayed
in metric units. For example, distance will be
displayed in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in
kilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC (L/100 km)
is chosen, all information will be displayed in metric
units. For example, distance will be displayed in
kilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and exit out of the customizable
options.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 264. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 264.
212
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
Familiarize yourself with its operation.
Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition is
turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 108 for more information.
Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on
the display. AM or PM will appear on the display
(Radio with CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)).
Press and hold M until the correct minute
appears on the display. The time can be set with
the ignition on or off.
213
Radio with CD
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
P
(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
214
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP button until the desired option displays, then
hold this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds
and the selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.
Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. NONE displays if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
selection displays.
e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
t SEEK u: Press and release the right or
the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous
station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN displays and
one beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again or one of
the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN displays and the
two beeps sound. The radio goes to a preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or
one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
215
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service
and MP3 Features): If the current station
has a message, the information symbol displays.
Press this button to see the message. The
message can display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To
scroll through the message, press and release the
information button. A new group of words
display after every press of this button. Once the
complete message displays, the information
symbol disappears until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed
by pressing the information button. The last
message can be viewed until a new message is
received or you tune to a different station.
When a message is not available from a station,
No Info displays.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) to
select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set, returns and the equalization that
was selected is stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
216
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e
(Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob
until BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turn
this knob to increase or to decrease the tone. The
display shows the bass or the treble level. If a
station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle
position, while in bass or treble, push and hold the
tone knob. One beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the tone knob when
no tone or speaker control displays. ALL
CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop,
rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are
included only if your vehicle has the Bose
®
system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through
seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the tone knob until BASS and
TREB displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e
(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push and
release this knob until BAL (balance) displays.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the speaker knob
until FADE displays. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push the
tone knob, then push it again and hold it until
one beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the tone knob when
no tone or speaker control is displayed. ALL
CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
217
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category
select mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow to go to that category’s
first station.
4. To go to another station within that category
and the category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow again. If CAT times out and is no
longer on the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or
wait for CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the
last station you were listening to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR displays it means that
the radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take
your vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 239 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing. To insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP (display) knob.
218
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, READING and the CD
symbol displays. As each new track starts to play,
the track number also displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 261 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
1
r (Previous): Press this pushbutton to
reverse within the track.
2
[ (Next): Press this pushbutton to fast forward
within the track.
219
3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a
track over again. RPT ON displays. The current
track continues to repeat. Press this pushbutton
again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
4
y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ON displays. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play. RDM OFF displays.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current or the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If
a track is approximately 10 seconds into its song,
press either the left or right arrow twice to get
to the previous or next track.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds until one beep sounds and SCAN
displays. The CD searches the previous or
next tracks at two seconds per track. Press either
arrow to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see how
long the current track has been playing. The
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.
To change the default on the display, track or
elapsed time, press this button until the desired
option displays, then hold the button for
two seconds. One beep sounds and the
selected display becomes the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD symbol displays
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select an equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is set whenever a
CD is played. See “AUTO EQ” listed previously
for more information. If you select an EQ setting
for your CD, it is activated each time a CD plays.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Eject can be activated with either the ignition or
radio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition and
radio off if this button is pressed first.
220
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3
feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 233 later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the
CD ejects, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See Using an MP3 on page 233 later in this
section.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
221
Radio with Six-Disc CD
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
222
Playing the Radio
P
(Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY (program type),
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until the desired option displays, then
hold this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds
and the selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.
Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. NONE displays if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
selection displays.
e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
223
t SEEK u: Press and release the right or the
left arrow to go to the next or to the previous
station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Press and hold either arrow for more than
two seconds. SCAN displays and one beep
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to
stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Press and hold this button until PSCN displays and
two beeps sound. The radio goes to a preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or
one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio
Service): If the current station has a message,
the information symbol displays. Press this button
to see the message. The message can display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words display after every
press of this button. Once the complete message
displays, the information symbol disappears until
another new message is received. The last
message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button. The last message can be viewed until a new
message is received or if you tune to a different
station.
When a message is not available from a station, No
Info displays.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to
play stations that are programmed on the
radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
224
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) to
select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set, returns and the
equalization that was selected is stored for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e
(Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob
until BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turn
this knob to increase or to decrease the tone. The
display shows the bass or the treble level. If a
station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle
position, while in bass or treble, push and hold the
tone knob. One beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the tone knob when
no tone or speaker control is displayed. ALL
CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop,
rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options
are included only if your vehicle has the Bose
®
system. Press the AUTO EQ button to select
equalization settings designed for equalization
one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the tone knob until BASS and
TREB displays.
225
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e
(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push and
release this knob until BAL (balance) displays.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the tone knob until
FADE displays. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the tone knob, then push it
again and hold it until one beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, while in fade or balance, push and
hold the tone knob when no tone or speaker
control is displayed. ALL CENTERED displays and
a beep sounds.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category
select mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category displays, press
either SEEK arrow to go to that category’s
first station.
4. To go to another station within that category
and the category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow again. If CAT times out and
no longer displays, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or
wait for CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the
last station you were listening to.
226
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that the
radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer
for service.
LOC (Locked): This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take
your vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 239 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, READING and the CD
symbol displays. As each new track starts to play,
the track number also displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 261 for more information.
227
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right
of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, flashes and LOAD #
displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the
CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light
flashes again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not
try to load more than six.
228
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
CDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the
loading function. The radio begins to play the last
CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number
for each CD displays.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the
CD button, then press the numbered pushbutton
that corresponds to the CD. A small bar appears
under the CD number that is playing and the
track number appears on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for
five seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, flashes and EJECT
ALL displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # displays. The CD ejects and
can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light
flashes again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or
the eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second
time ends, the player senses an error and tries to
eject the CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after you have tried to push it in
manually. The player’s 25-second eject timer
resets at each press of the eject button, causing
the player to not eject the CD until the 25-second
time period has elapsed.
229
r(Reverse): Press this button to reverse within
the track.
[(Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward within the track.
N (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track
or an entire CD can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the repeat button. RPT ON
displays. Press this button again to turn off
repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
To repeat the CD you are listening to, press
and hold the repeat button for two seconds.
RPT ON displays. Press this button again
to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
y (Random): With the random setting, you can
listen to the tracks in random, rather than
sequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release the
random button. RANDOM ONE displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
To play the tracks on all of the CDs that
are loaded in random order, press and
hold this button for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the CD.
To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN a displays and a
beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track,
plays for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
230
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until CD SCAN displays
and a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to
10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. The elapsed
time of the track displays. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press
this knob until the desired option displays, then
hold the knob for two seconds. One beep sounds
and the selected display becomes the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the
radio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s)
remains inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD symbol displays
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select an equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is set whenever a
CD is played. See “AUTO EQ” listed previously
for more information. If you select an EQ setting
for your CD, it is activated each time a CD plays.
Using Song List Mode
R
(Song List): The six-disc CD changer has a
feature called song list. This feature is capable
of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in
this section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not display.
If S-LIST displays, press the song list button to
turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
SCAN right arrow to locate the track to be
saved. the track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save
the track into memory. When the song list
button is pressed, one beep sounds. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the song
list button, two beeps sound to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
231
S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than
20 selections.
To play the song list, press the song list button.
One beep sounds and S-LIST displays. The
recorded tracks begins to play in the order they
were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track
returns to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays.
3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for
two seconds. When the song list button
is pressed, one beep sounds. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the
song list button, two beeps sound to confirm
that the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more
than four seconds. One beep sounds,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and
a final beep sounds after four seconds.
S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the song
list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
saved to the song list again are added to the
bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed from
the display.
232
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension, other file extensions might not work.
Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album can display when files are recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
Make sure to finalize the disc while burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
233
The player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and
255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlist
names can use more disc memory space than
necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. You can also play an MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep
the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will not play.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the
directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder is not displayed.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions do not function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then go to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
234
Order of Play
Tracks play in the following order:
Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
If the CD does not contain any playlists, then
play begins from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have played, play continues from
files according to their numerical listing. After
playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first
folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default
display. See DISP later in this section for more
information. The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the file name is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which
were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,
or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you cannot
edit them. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The
CD should begin playing and the CD symbol
displays. To insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP (display) knob.
235
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 261 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
1
r (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the same track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues
moving backward through the CD.
2
[ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to
fast forward within the track. If this pushbutton
is held or pressed more than once, the player
continues moving forward through the CD.
236
3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a
track over again. RPT On displays. The current
track continues to repeat. Press this pushbutton
again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
4
y (Random): To random the tracks in the
current folder or playlist, press and release this
pushbutton. FLDR RDM displays. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have played,
the system moves on to the next folder or playlist
and plays all of the tracks in random order.
To play all the tracks on the CD in random order,
press and hold this pushbutton for two seconds. A
beep sounds and CD RDM displays. This feature
does not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either
SEEK arrow takes the CD to the next or previous
randomized track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM displays.
5
! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton
to go to the first track in the previous folder.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode
takes the CD to the previous folder and
randomizes the tracks in that folder.
6
# (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder. Pressing
this button while in folder random mode takes the
CD to the next folder and randomizes the
tracks in that folder.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Press the right arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Press either
arrow for more than two seconds and SCAN
displays. The radio scans the previous or
next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the
arrow to stop scanning and to play the track.
237
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch
between track mode, folder/playlist mode, and
time of day mode. The display shows only
eight characters, but there can be up to four pages
of text. If there are more than eight characters
in the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing this
knob within two seconds takes the CD to
the next page of text. If there are no other
pages to be shown, pressing this knob within
two seconds takes the CD to the next
display mode.
Track mode displays the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder
or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode displays the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until the desired option displays,
then hold this knob for two seconds. One beep
sounds and the selected display becomes
the default.
4 (Information): INFO displays whenever a
current track has ID3 tag information. Press this
button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO disappears from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag
has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD symbol displays
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select an equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is set whenever a
CD is played. See “AUTO EQ” listed previously
for more information. If you select an EQ setting
for your CD, it is activated each time a CD plays.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and
radio off if this button is pressed first.
238
XM Radio Messages
If you have a Radio with CD, you will receive these radio display messages.
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
239
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
No Info Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
240
If you have a Radio with Six-Disc CD, you will receive these radio display messages.
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavail Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
241
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
No Info Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
242
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
includes a DVD player, a video display screen,
two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
control.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen.
Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to
freeze the video and mute the audio. The video
screen will display Parental Control ON and the
power indicator light on the DVD player will flash. It
will also disable all other button operations from the
remote control and the DVD player, with the
exception of the eject button. Press this button
again to restore operation of the DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the ignition is in RUN, ACC, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
243
Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob.
To adjust the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video
display screen. The headphones will shut
off automatically if they lose the signal from the
system after about four minutes to save battery
power. The signal may be lost if the system
is turned off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front
seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite
Radio Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio
for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD
that is currently playing through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment
door located on the left side of the headphone
earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the
compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
244
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen. The RCA jacks allow audio and video
signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to
the RSE system. Standard RCA cables, not
included, are needed to connect the auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. The yellow connector
inputs video and the red and white connectors
input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection
of the auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the
color-coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the RSE system power on. If the
RSE system had been previously in the DVD
player mode, pressing the SRCE button on
the faceplate or the remote control will switch the
RSE system between the auxiliary device and
the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in
the PAL system. To change the video format,
perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the
Video Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may
be heard through the following possible sources:
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear
Seat Audio system (if equipped)
245
The RSE system will always transmit the audio
signal by infrared to the wireless headphones,
if there is audio available. See “Headphones”
previously for more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the vehicle speakers by using the radio. The
RSE system may be selected as an audio source
on the radio if the RSE system power is on.
Once the RSE system is selected as an audio
source on the radio, adjust the speaker volume on
the radio, if necessary. If the RSE system power
is not on, the RSE system will not be an available
source on the radio. Refer to the radio information
for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system (if equipped). The RSE system may
be selected as an audio source on the rear
seat audio system if the RSE system power is on.
Refer to XXX for more information.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead
console. To use the video screen, push forward
on the release latch and the screen will fold down.
Adjust the screen’s position as desired. When
the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to
operate when the screen is in the up or the down
position. The video screen contains the
transmitters for the wireless headphones and the
remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
246
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead
console. The DVD player can be controlled by the
buttons on the DVD player and/or by the buttons
on the remote control. See “Remote Control” later
in this section for more information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when
the ignition is in RUN, ACC, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the
country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD
region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD
and Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by
this DVD player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media
is supported if formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R
and DVD+RW media may or may not be supported
by the DVD player. The DVD player does not
support DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio
media. An error message will appear on the
display if this type of media is inserted into the
DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if
the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio
with Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite
Radio Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio
for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is
currently playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
247
DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE
system on and off. The power indicator light
will illuminate when the power is on.
X(Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press
this button twice to return to the beginning of
the DVD.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
y(Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.
z(Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,
and dynamic range compression. The dynamic
range compression feature can be used to reduce
loud audio and increase low audio produced by
some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default
setting, press this button to display the feature,
then press and hold this button. The default setting
will appear on the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and
hold this button to display and to remove the track
and time information.
248
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r(Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
c / X (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop
playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD
or CD. Press this button twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than
three seconds to eject a DVD or CD.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label
side up into the loading slot. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start, if the vehicle is in RUN,
ACC, or when RAP is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the
play/pause button on the DVD player faceplate or
on the remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
skipping of the copyright information or the
previews. Some DVDs will begin playing after the
previews have finished. If the DVD does not
begin to play the main title, refer to the on-screen
instructions.
249
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control. The movie should resume play from where
it was last stopped, if the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed
twice. If the disc has been ejected or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will
resume play at the beginning.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate
to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on
the remote control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
a short period of time. The disc will be stored
in the DVD player. The DVD player will not resume
play of the disc automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the
desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
may affect the ability of the RSE system to
receive signals from the remote control. If the
remote control does not seem to be working, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect
the function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote
control does not have a press and hold feature.
250
Remote Control Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
v(Title): Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
z(Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,
and dynamic range compression. The dynamic
range compression feature can be used to reduce
loud audio and increase low audio produced by
some DVDs.
e(Audio): Press this button to display a menu
that will only appear when a DVD is being played.
The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,
press this button again. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press
this button twice to return to the beginning of
the DVD.
251
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to return to the previous
track or chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides you with the capability of
direct chapter, title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater
than 9. Press this button before inputting the
number.
\(Clear): Press this button within three seconds
after inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P(Illumination): Press this button to turn
the remote control backlight on. The backlight will
time out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other
button is pressed while the backlight is on.
y(Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.
r(Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
q(Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button will operate only when a DVD is
playing and a menu is active.
|(Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function will vary for each disc.
{(Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles
and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
252
[(Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press this button again. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button
then press the fast forward button. The DVD will
continue playing in a slow play mode. To cancel
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
u(Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to
advance to the beginning of the next track
or chapter. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located
on the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
253
Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Disc will not play. The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into
the DVD player.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
Problem Recommended Action
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure
there is no obstruction
between the remote
control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
254
Problem Recommended Action
After stopping the player,
I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off and
sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed
two times the DVD player
will begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from the radio
for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
The RSE is working
correctly.
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
255
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be
displayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if the
disc is not readable, or if the format is not
compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed
if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed
if the DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched
or damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any
of the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote
control are pressed and no disc is present in the
DVD player.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion
in the wireless headphones when operating
cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global
Positioning Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios,
mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar
®
System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean
cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do not
spray directly onto the screen and do not press too
hard or too long on the video screen.
256
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to select
and listen to any of the available radio sources:
AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear
seat passenger cannot control a source selected
on the radio by someone in the front of the
vehicle. For example, the RSA cannot be used to
change CD tracks if the radio is set to CD.
Also, if the radio is switched to a source the RSA
has control of, sound will not be lost, but the
RSA will lose control of that sourse.
Rear seat passengers always have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
The RSA will run when the radio is off if the
ignition key is positioned in the power mode, see
XXX in this manual.
P(Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on
or off. The rear speakers are muted when the
power is turned on.
u(Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand
knob controls the headphone outlet on the
right. Turn either knob clockwise to increase the
volume and counterclockwise to decrease the
volume.
257
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an
audio source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The
inactive CD, or DVD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening. There are sources that are
internal to the radio, such as AM/FM, and CD and
other sources to radio that are external, such as
XM™, DVD, and OnStar
®
. If an external source has
been selected, the rear seat passengers cannot
select a different external source.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station
or CD track and stay there. The display will
show the selection. This function is inactive if the
radio is set to the same source.
To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the
SEEK button for two seconds and the radio
will go to the next preset station. Hold this button
down and the radio will continue to go through
all available preset stations. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to
go to the next track on the CD. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player,
press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds
to go you to the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK
®
is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to
a different vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKED
displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK
®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK
®
activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
258
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They include the following:
u SEEK t: Press the forward or the back
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio
station and stay there. The radio will only
seek stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the forward or the
back arrow to fast forward or reverse.
g(OnStar
®
/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar,
press this button to interact with the OnStar
system. See the OnStar
®
System on page 125 in
this manual for more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this
button to mute the system. Press it again, or
any other radio button, to turn on the sound.
NXT (Next): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset
stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if
multiple CDs are loaded.
+ SRC (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus ()
button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded the
CD symbol will appear on the display.
+ VOL (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the ()
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
259
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.
If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boosts the power levels during the day, and then
reduce these levels during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When this happens,
try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
260
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to the antenna base located on
the hood of the vehicle. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of
the XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof
is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
261
NOTES
262
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 264
Defensive Driving ...................................... 264
Drunken Driving ........................................ 265
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 268
Braking ...................................................... 268
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 269
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 271
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 271
StabiliTrak
®
System ................................... 271
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 275
Steering .................................................... 276
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 278
Passing ..................................................... 278
Loss of Control .......................................... 280
Off-Road Driving ........................................ 281
Driving at Night ......................................... 281
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 282
City Driving ............................................... 285
Freeway Driving ........................................ 286
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 287
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 288
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 288
Winter Driving ........................................... 291
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 295
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 296
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 296
Towing ........................................................ 302
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 302
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 302
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System ................................ 303
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 305
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
263
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 18.
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
264
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
265
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally
will reach a higher BAC level than a man of
her same body weight will when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
266
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking driver or
passenger is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious or
even fatal collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
267
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the
brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All
three systems have to do their work at the places
where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 322.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 183.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
268
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 322.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning
Light on page 184.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP
problem, both the brake and ABS warning lights
will come on accompanied by a 10-second
chime. The lights and chime will come on each
time the ignition is turned on until the problem is
repaired. See your dealer for service.
269
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
270
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have
time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some
noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip
rear axle can give you additional traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
this feature will allow the wheel with traction to
move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak
®
System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak
®
,
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) which combines
antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
Traction control activates when the controller
senses wheel spin. StabiliTrak
®
will selectively
apply the brakes and reduce engine torque to help
regain traction.
Stability control activates when the controller
senses a discrepancy between your intended
path and the direction the vehicle is travelling.
StabiliTrak
®
selectively applies braking pressure at
any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help guide
the vehicle in the direction which you are steering.
271
When you first start your vehicle and begin to
drive away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to insure there are no problems. You may
hear or feel the system working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a problem with
your vehicle. If driving conditions delay system
initialization, the STABILITRAK NOT READY
message may be displayed. If this is the case,
your vehicle does not need servicing.
For more information on the stability messages,
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.
When the StabiliTrak
®
system is both on and
actively controlling
the stability of the
vehicle, the StabiliTrak
®
light will blink for the
duration of the event.
You may also feel or hear the system working.
This is normal.
The StabiliTrak
®
disable
button is located on
the transmission
shift handle.
The StabiliTrak
®
system has three modes of
operation: STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION
CONTROL OFF, and STABILITRAK OFF.
STABILITRAK ON The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak
®
light will be off and no
DIC messages will be displayed.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF The driver can
modify the engine speed management system by
momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button on the
transmission shift handle. The StabiliTrak
®
light will
come on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be
displayed. For vehicles without a DIC, the
StabiliTrak
®
indicator light will come on.
Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button
again will return the system to the STABILITRAK
ON mode.
272
STABILITRAK OFF The driver can turn off
StabiliTrak
®
by pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button for
more than five seconds. The StabiliTrak
®
light
will come on and STABILITRAK OFF will be
displayed. For vehicles without a DIC, the
StabiliTrak
®
indicator light will come on.
Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button again
will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON
mode. See StabiliTrak
®
Off below for more
information.
Traction Control Off
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction
control are functional. Engine speed management
will be modified and the driven wheels can spin
more freely. This can cause the brake-traction
control to activate more frequently. If the controller
detects excessive wheel spin in this mode, the
StabiliTrak
®
indicator light may blink and the
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed
to warn the driver that damage may occur to the
transfer case.
StabiliTrak
®
Off
In this mode, both stability control and part of the
traction control system are disabled. Your vehicle
will still have brake-traction control, but will not
be able to use the engine speed management
system. You may still hear system noises
as a result of the brake-traction control coming on.
If the controller detects excessive wheel spin in
this mode, the StabiliTrak
®
indicator light may blink
and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may
be displayed to warn the driver that damage may
occur to the transfer case.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you may want
to “rock” your vehicle in an attempt to free it. It may
also be necessary to turn off the system when
driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295 for
more information.
273
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak
®
system events and the corresponding messages and lights
that will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DIC Event
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
DIC Message
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light
Off None Off Off
StabiliTrak
®
On mode
(System is fully enabled,
but is not actively
controlling vehicle stability).
Solid Traction Control Off Solid Off Traction Control Off Mode
Solid StabiliTrak
®
Off Solid Off
StabiliTrak
®
Off Mode
(StabiliTrak
®
indicator light
will flash when system first
enters this mode).
Blinking StabiliTrak
®
Active Blinking Off
StabiliTrak
®
system
activates using engine
speed management, brake
traction control, and/or
stability control.
Solid Service StabiliTrak
®
Solid Solid
StabiliTrak
®
system is
disabled due to a
system fault.
Solid
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready
Solid Off
StabiliTrak
®
system is
disabled due to a failure
to initialize.
274
Notice: If the StabiliTrak
®
light comes on due
to heavy braking and/or because the traction
control system has been continuously active,
do not allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively. If you do, you may be causing
damage to the transfer case. This could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the StabiliTrak
®
, ABS
and brake warning lights and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are displayed, you
could damage the transfer case. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
StabiliTrak
®
may activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy acceleration
while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a
noise or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak
®
light will blink, and
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow, you may re-engage
the cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 156.
StabiliTrak
®
will turn off automatically if a problem
is detected in the system. The StabiliTrak
®
light will come on and SERVICE STABILITRAK
will be displayed on the DIC. For vehicles without a
DIC, the StabiliTrak
®
light and the StabiliTrak
®
service light will both come on. If the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak
®
service
light) does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 322 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Your vehicle has this feature. There is no lever or
switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic and adjusts as needed for
road conditions. Your vehicle has an active
transfer case allowing two-wheel-drive operation
on dry roads. The transfer case will shift
automatically into all-wheel drive on slippery
surfaces. You may feel an extra shift when the
all-wheel drive engages.
275
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems steering and acceleration have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 322.
276
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking if you can stop in time. But sometimes
you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for
evasive action steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 268. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
277
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
278
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
279
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly
enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be
ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
280
Off-Road Driving
Your vehicle does not have features like added
ground clearance, special underbody shielding, and
a transfer case low gear range, things that are
necessary for extended or severe off-road service.
You should not drive off-road unless you are on a
level, solid surface.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Do not drink and drive.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
281
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the
dark. When you are faced with severe glare, as
from a driver who does not lower the high beams, or
a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a
little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching
headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness the inability to see in dim
light and are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
282
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if
a lot of water is standing on the road. If you
can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or
other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
283
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
As little as six inches of flowing water
can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 380.
284
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 286.
Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
285
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
286
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower than
you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh such as
after a day’s work do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They will
be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
287
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a
rest, service, or parking area and take a nap,
get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
288
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
289
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
290
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 380.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a
flashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
291
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
292
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 269.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
293
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under
your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
294
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transmission or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 404.
295
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as
little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By
slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
your vehicle out after a few tries, it may need to be
towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 302.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
296
Tire and Loading Information Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 380 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 388.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Label Example
297
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
a Trailer on page 305 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
298
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
Example 1
Example 2
299
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
Your vehicle has an electronically controlled air
suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle.
See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 303 for additional information.
Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
Example 3
300
This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer
tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer for additional details.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
301
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else they will go
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 469.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind
a motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
302
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
any of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle
must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier
in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground, or even with
only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an
all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled air suspension system that automatically
keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload.
The system includes a compressor, two height
sensors, and two air springs supporting the
rear axle.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged
periods. If the system overheats, all leveling
function stops until the system cools down.
During this time, the indicator light on the air
inflator switch will be flashing.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,
in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride
height after loading. The system can lower
the vehicle to the standard ride height after
unloading with the ignition on and also for up to
30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
You may hear the compressor operating when you
load your vehicle, and periodically as the system
adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Load leveling will not function normally with the
inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove
the inflator hose from the outlet during loading
and unloading.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of
time, some bleed down of the suspension is
normal. Upon starting the vehicle, proper height
will be achieved.
303
Overload Protection
The air suspension system is equipped with
overload protection. Overload protection is
designed to protect the air suspension system,
and it is an indicator to the driver that the
vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to
the air compressor. However, do not overload
the vehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 296.
If the suspension remains at a low height,
the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating). When the overload
protection mode is activated, the compressor
operates for about 30 seconds to one minute
without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time
the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load
is reduced below GAWR.
Indicator Light
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the
rear passenger compartment also serves as an
indicator for internal system error. If the indicator
light is flashing without the load leveling function
or the inflator being active, turn off the ignition.
The next day turn on the ignition and check
the indicator light. The vehicle can be driven with
the light flashing, but if it is you should have
the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
304
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer
for advice and information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Always follow the instructions in this
section and check with your dealer for more
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,
braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
305
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to
shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if
necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions).
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used
to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
306
Use the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR
AWD (L6 Engine) 3.73 5,600 lbs (2 540 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
AWD (V8 Engine) 3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
is the total allowable weight of the completely
loaded vehicle and trailer including any
passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion.
The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 468.
307
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 296 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
up to a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight
carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A)
should be 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight, up to a maximum of 750 lbs (340 kg)
with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch ball closest
to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect
of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
308
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to get them right simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight
may reduce your trailering capacity more than
the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the
front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear
axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),
a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times
as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
309
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front
axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle
weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).
You may go further and think you must limit
tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still
consider the effect on the rear axle. Because your
rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you
can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle
without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue
weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.
Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of
tongue weight. Since tongue weight is usually
at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight,
you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle
can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
310
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Certification label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 296 for more information. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make
sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you’ll need
the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch
must be adjusted so the distance (A) remains
the same both before and after coupling the trailer
to the tow vehicle.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
311
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,
will weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure
to use a properly mounted weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size.
This equipment is very important for proper
vehicle loading and good handling when driving.
Always use a sway control if the trailer will
weigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and
they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your
vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,
both braking systems won’t work well.
You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder
that sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t
use copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend
and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
312
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness or death.
See Engine Exhaust on page 119.
To maximize your safety when towing
a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or
another opening, drive with your front,
main heating or cooling system on
and with the fan on any speed. This
will bring fresh, outside air into your
vehicle. Do not use the climate control
setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your
vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 167.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
313
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle and
trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
314
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing your signal
when they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear,
under heavy loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will
boil at a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately
after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
your vehicle may show signs similar to engine
overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 347.
315
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
316
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine
oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
and bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped
with the trailering package) that is attached to a
bracket on the hitch platform. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the heavy-duty trailer connector,
you can purchase one from your Saab dealer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring
terminal must be fastened to a stud on the
underhood electrical center before the
trailer feed will become active.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector
is available from your dealer.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly charge the battery.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an
electric trailer brake controller. These wires are
located inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel. These wires should be
connected to an electric trailer brake controller by
your dealer or a qualified service center.
317
NOTES
318
Service ........................................................ 322
Accessories and Modifications ................... 322
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 322
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 323
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 323
Fuel ............................................................. 324
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 324
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 324
California Fuel ........................................... 324
Additives ................................................... 325
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 326
Filling the Tank ......................................... 326
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 328
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 329
Hood Release ........................................... 329
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 330
Engine Oil ................................................. 334
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 337
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 339
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 341
Engine Coolant .......................................... 344
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 347
Engine Overheating ................................... 347
Cooling System ......................................... 349
Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 355
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 356
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 357
Brakes ...................................................... 358
Battery ...................................................... 361
Jump Starting ............................................ 362
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 368
Rear Axle .................................................... 369
Front Axle ................................................... 370
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 371
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 371
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........ 371
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 372
Headlamps ................................................ 372
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ....................................... 374
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 374
License Plate Lamp ................................... 376
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 376
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
319
Windshield Replacement ............................ 377
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 377
Tires ............................................................ 380
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 381
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 385
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 388
High-Speed Operation ............................... 390
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 391
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 396
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 397
Buying New Tires ...................................... 398
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 400
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 400
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 402
Wheel Replacement .................................. 402
Tire Chains ............................................... 404
Accessory Inflator ...................................... 404
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 406
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 406
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 408
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 410
Secondary Latch System ........................... 416
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 420
Spare Tire ................................................. 423
Appearance Care ........................................ 423
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 423
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 425
Leather ...................................................... 426
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 426
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 427
Weatherstrips ............................................ 427
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 427
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 428
Finish Care ............................................... 428
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .... 429
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 429
Tires ......................................................... 430
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 430
Finish Damage .......................................... 430
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 431
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 431
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 432
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
320
Vehicle Identification .................................. 433
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 433
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 433
Electrical System ........................................ 434
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 434
Headlamps ................................................ 434
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 434
Power Windows and
Other Power Options ............................. 435
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 435
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 435
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 442
Capacities and Specifications .................... 445
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
321
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service and parts needs.
Accessories and Modifications
When you add non-Saab accessories to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
Saab accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your Saab dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine Saab accessories. When you go to
your Saab dealer and ask for Saab accessories,
you will know that Saab-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work
using genuine Saab accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
322
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 80.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 462.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
323
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we recommend
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
page 325 for additional information.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control label.
If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will
operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 187. If this occurs,
return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
324
If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Also, your dealer has additives that will
help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. We recommend that you
use these gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier. However,
E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to
your dealer for service.
325
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel
or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
This is against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.
326
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 427.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 187.
327
There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap
is not properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Light
on page 194 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling,
do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
328
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood,
first pull the handle
with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle
under the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push
the secondary hood latch up and to the right
to release it, then lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly. Check to make sure the hood
is closed and repeat the process if necessary.
329
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:
330
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 339.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling
System on page 349.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 357.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 356.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 341.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 334.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 347.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 334.
I. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 362.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 358.
K. Battery. See Battery on page 361.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 435.
331
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
332
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling
System on page 349.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 339.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 357.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 334.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 341.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 334.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 347.
H. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 362.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 356.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 358.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 435.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 361.
333
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
334
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L)
for the 4.2L L6 engine or below the
cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for
the 5.3L V8 engine, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 445.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area (F) that shows the
proper operating range for the 4.2L L6 engine
or above the cross-hatched area for the
5.3L V8 engine, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 330 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when
you are through.
335
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets standard
GM6094M.
SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
336
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are
identified as meeting standard GM6094M and
have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting standard GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to
use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
337
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message
will come on in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 199. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system may not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this work and reset
the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the
following:
1. Use the fuel button on the Driver Information
Center to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.
2. Press and hold the select button on the
Driver Information Center five seconds
while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display for
10 seconds to let you know the system
is reset.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
338
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer,
a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 330 for the
location of the engine
air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450 for
more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
339
How to Inspect
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine
cleaner/filter and lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing.
Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt
as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
340
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals
listed in Additional Required Services on page 452,
and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 458.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine
temperature gage moves and then remains steady
for 10 minutes.
341
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the
engine off, but this is used only as a reference.
Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is
colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the
engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during this cold check, you must check the fluid
hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the
fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine,
follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then remove the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with this symbol
on it is located in the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 330 for more information on location.
2. Reinstall it back in all the way, wait three
seconds and then pull it back out again. If
the dipstick does not go down the tube easily,
turn the blade and try again until it is fully
inserted in the tube.
342
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD
area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold
check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for
a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick
pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
reinstall the dipstick back in all the way;
then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings
persist, contact your dealer.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission
fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a
reference. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to
the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take
much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the
handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
343
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL
®
extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 347.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at the
first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL
®
coolant. If you use
this coolant mixture, you do not need to add
anything else.
344
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times
a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed
in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 458 for more information.
345
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The cap has this symbol
on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 330 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
FULL COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never have
to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn
the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
346
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 349.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330
for information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 186 for more
information.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), the display will show an Engine Coolant
Hot/Engine Overheated message. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 199 for more
information.
347
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or
hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off
and get everyone away from the vehicle
until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little
too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
348
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push
down the accelerator until the engine speed
is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for
at least three minutes while you are parked. If you
still have the warning, turn off the engine and
get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
4.2L L6 Engine
349
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should
be at least up to the
FULL COLD mark.
If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5.3L V8 Engine
350
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine
again. The engine cooling fan speed should
increase when idle speed is doubled by pushing
the accelerator pedal down. If it does not,
your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
351
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 344
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
352
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means there is
still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove
the pressure cap.
353
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 344
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
354
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight
and fully seated.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.
When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster
to provide more air to cool the engine. In most
everyday driving conditions the clutch is not
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is
merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is
not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
disengages.
355
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 330 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid
loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level
should be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with
the 5.3L V8 engine, the level should be at the
FULL mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to
bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
356
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 330
for reservoir location.
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
357
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 330 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or
will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in
this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 450.
358
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off
the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above
MIN. If it is not, have
your brake system
checked to see if there
is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not
over the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 458.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 427.
359
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear.
360
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality brake parts. When you replace
parts of your braking system — for example, when
your brake linings wear down and you need
new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes
may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance you have come to expect
can change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 330 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
361
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative ()
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 362 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
362
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets, if equipped. Turn off the radio and all
lamps that are not needed. This will avoid
sparks and help to save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
363
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries.
Find the positive (+) and negative ()
terminals on each battery. Your vehicle has a
remote negative () jump starting terminal.
You should always use this remote terminal
instead of the terminal on the battery.
The remote negative () terminal is located on
the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with
the 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory
drive bracket for vehicles with the
5.3L V8 engine, and is marked GND (Ground).
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 330 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
364
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ()
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative () terminal if the
vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+)
to negative () or you will get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other
parts too. And do not connect the negative ()
cable to the negative () terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+)
terminal of the dead
battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
365
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to
the negative () terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative () terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative ()
cable does not go to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to the remote negative () terminal on
the vehicle with the dead battery. Your
vehicle has a remote negative () terminal,
marked GND, for this purpose.
The remote negative () terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket for the
4.2L L6 engine, and on the accessory drive
bracket for the 5.3L V8 engine.
9. Connect the other end of the negative ()
cable to the remote negative () terminal
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,
it probably needs service.
4.2L L6 Engine 5.3L V8 Engine
366
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative () Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
367
All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle
should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need to
add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.
368
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located
on the rear axle.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use
SAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115. To completely refill after
draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip Axle
Lubricant Additive (GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694). Then fill to the bottom of the filler
plug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
369
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the front axle, you may need
to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the
filler plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.
370
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory
and should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the headlamp aim may be affected.
Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps may
be necessary if it is difficult to see the lane
markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers
flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for
vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommend that you take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 376.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very high
voltage. If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer or a
qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
371
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 329.
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to release
the headlamp assembly from the vehicle.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the
vehicle to access the electrical connectors.
372
4. Remove the bulb cover for the high beam (A)
and low beam (B) bulbs.
5. Remove the bulb socket that needs to be
replaced by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the old bulb.
7. Plug the electrical connector into the new
bulb using care not to touch the glass with
your fingers.
8. Install the new bulb socket and turn it
clockwise to secure.
9. Reinstall the bulb covers.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.
11. Press down on the retaining clips to secure
the headlamp assembly.
373
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps on
page 372 to access the front turn signal,
sidemarker or parking lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove it from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to
release it from the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it
clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up
the headlamp assembly with the slots in the
headlamp retaining clips.
7. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
A. Back-up Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
374
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass
on page 98 for more information.
2. Remove the screws
from the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the
vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it
from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until
it clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up
the locator pins with the retainers in the body
of the vehicle.
9. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.
10. Close the liftgate.
375
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws holding the
license plate lamp lens.
2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the
bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten
the screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamp 921
Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp 5702 NAK
Front/Rear Sidemarker 194
License Plate Lamp W5W
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam 9005
Low-Beam (Halogen Only) H11
Rear Turn Signal 3757 AK
Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
376
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic
windshield. If you ever have to have your
windshield replaced be sure to get an acoustic
windshield so you will continue to have the benefits
an acoustic windshield can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 450.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch
the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper
arm until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot
locking tab. Pull down on the blade
assembly to release it from the wiper
arm hook.
377
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches at one end that
are locked by the bottom claws of the
blade assembly. At the notched end, pull the
insert from the blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the
insert (D), notched end last, into the end
with two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all
the way through the blade claws at the
opposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will be
forced off as the insert is fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws are
properly locked on both sides of the insert slots.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade
assembly onto the windshield.
378
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of
the park rest position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should
be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it
off of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in
position and push the blade away from
the wiper arm.
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park
rest position.
379
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your Saab Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 296.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 388.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 390 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
380
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
381
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 400.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 388
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
382
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 388 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 388 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
383
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered
to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letters LT as the first two characters in the
tire size means a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,
as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric)
tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’s
sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
384
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 388.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
385
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 296.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 388 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 296.
386
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 400.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 296.
387
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the
driver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air
pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the tire and loading information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 296. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
388
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading information label,
no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
389
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed operation,
in excellent condition, and set to the
correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P255/55R18 104H size tires
installed on the rear axle, they will require
inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds above 99 mph (160 km/h).
Set the cold inflation pressure, for the rear tires
only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown on
the tire sidewall, or 36 psi (248 kPa), whichever
is lower. See the example following. When you end
this high-speed driving, return the tires to the
cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 296.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at
36 psi (248 kPa).
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be
set to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your
warranty booklet for more information.
390
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
levels. TPMS sensors are mounted on each tire
and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low
tire pressure condition exists. Tire pressure
levels may also be checked by using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) Trip Information
button, located on the instrument panel. See “Tire
Pressures” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 195 for additional information.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol located on the instrument panel
cluster, and at the same time a message will also
appear on the DIC display. The low tire pressure
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster
and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the DIC will appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays
see DIC Operation and Displays on page 195 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,
that the tire pressure monitor light, located on
the instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE message will appear when the
vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you
start to drive the vehicle. This could be an
early indicator that the tire pressures are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
391
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped
with a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one
or more of your tires
is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
392
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The Tire and Loading Information label
(tire information placard) shows the size of your
vehicle’s original tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 388. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 296.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 396 and Tires on page 380.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the
identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s side
front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to
each tire/wheel position by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure. When increasing
the tire’s pressure, do not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
393
You will have two minutes to match the first
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than two minutes, to match the first tire and
wheel, or more than five minutes to match all
four tire and wheel positions the matching process
stops and you will need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the
engine off.
3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parking
lamps four times within three seconds.
A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS
low tire warning light will begin to flash.
The double horn chirp and flashing TPMS
warning light indicate that the TPMS matching
process has started. The TPMS warning
light should continue flashing throughout the
matching procedure.
4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by
increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure
for 10 seconds, then stop and listen for a
single horn chirp. The single horn chirp should
sound within 15 seconds, confirming that
the sensor identification code has been
matched to this tire and wheel position.
If you do not hear the confirming single horn
chirp, you will need to start over with step
number one. To let air-pressure out of a tire
you can use the pointed end of the valve cap,
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
394
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, check to see if the
TPMS warning light is still flashing. If yes, turn
the ignition switch to LOCK to exit the
sensor matching process. If the TPMS warning
light is not flashing, the five minute time
limit has passed and you will need to start the
process over beginning with Step 1.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,
the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be
displayed on the DIC screen. This message should
go off once you re-install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
395
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397
and Wheel Replacement on page 402 for more
information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten
the cable. For information on storing or removing
the spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on
page 406.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first rotation is the most important.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 296, for an example of
the label and its location on your vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors will need to be reset after a tire rotation.
See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” under
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 391.
396
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 445.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 406.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
397
Buying New Tires
The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
the Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, Saab strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
The exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. The TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by a MS,
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 381 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
398
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 391.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label.
399
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes; traction control;
and stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use Saab specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
Saab certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 398 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 322 for
additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or, to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available may vary with respect to
these grades, they must also conform to federal
safety requirements.
400
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
401
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
402
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 406 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
original equipment wheel.
403
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash. Use another type of
traction device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on your vehicle
and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to
your vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or
remove the device if it is contacting your
vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle has an accessory inflator system.
It can also inflate things like basketballs and
bicycle tires. It can also used to inflate the tires to
the proper tire pressure. It is not designed to
inflate large objects which will require more than
five minutes to inflate, such as an air mattress.
The accessory inflator
is located in the rear
compartment on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle, behind an
access cover, and near
the liftgate opening.
To access the inflator, push in on the tab to
remove the cover.
404
You may also have an air inflator kit that is
located in the rear floor storage compartment.
It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with three nozzle
adapters.
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter
to the end of the hose if required.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate any object only to
its recommended pressure.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you
wish to inflate.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air
inflator on. The indicator light will remain on
when the inflator is running.
The system has an internal clock to prevent
the system from overheating. The system
will allow about five minutes of running time,
then the compressor will stop. The indicator
light will then begin to flash. When the indicator
is off, the inflator can be started again by
pressing the switch. If the compressor is still
hot, it may only run for a short time before
shutting off again.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the
inflator off.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it
in its proper location. Remove the inflator hose
from the outlet during loading and unloading. Load
leveling will not function with the inflator hose
attached to the inflator outlet. See Electronically
Controlled Air Suspension System on page 303 for
more information.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back
of the cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
If the indicator light on the accessory inflator
flashes continuously, it could indicate that there is
a malfunction in the air suspension system.
See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 303 for more information.
405
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Get the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 150 for more
information.
406
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
407
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored
under the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Rear Seat Operation on page 16
for more information.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on
the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.
The tools you will be using include the wheel
wrench (A), wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socket
end) (C), handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
408
The following instructions explain how to remove
the underbody-mounted spare located underneath
your vehicle.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to
the storage position under the vehicle when
it is supported by a jack, you could damage the
tire and/or your vehicle. Always remove or
restow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 98 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the
extension (C).
3. Insert the socket end of the extension (C) on
a 45 degree angle downward into the hoist
drive shaft hole. It is exposed when the
rear gate is open and is just above the rear
bumper.
Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)
connects to the hoist shaft (B).
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing
the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 416 for more information.
409
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when
the tire has been completely lowered, and pull
it through the wheel opening.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire
or secondary latch system cable has been
reinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.
Always reinstall this cable before driving your
vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has a wheel cap that covers
the wheel nuts, position the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the notch and pry it off.
410
2. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all
the wheel nuts.
Do not remove
them yet.
3. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by
hand to raise the jack lift head.
4. Place the handle, extension, and wheel
wrench onto the jack.
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. Handle
D. Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
5. Place the jack in the appropriate position
nearest the flat tire.
Front Position Rear Position
411
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit.
412
7. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel
nuts become loose after time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from the places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
8. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare
wheel.
413
9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
10. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the
rounded end is toward the wheel.
11. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is
held against the hub. If a nut cannot be
turned by hand, use the wheel wrench and
see your dealer as soon as possible.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
414
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere
as soon as you can and have the nuts
tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 445
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 445 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
13. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence
as shown.
415
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch
system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from
suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable
holding the spare tire is damaged. For the
secondary latch to work, the tire must be stored
with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 420
for instructions on storing the spare or flat tire
correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from under the spare.
416
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible.
If it is not visible,
proceed to Step 6.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground,
continue with Step 2 of Removing the Spare
Tire and Tools on page 408.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable
is exposed.
417
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the
wheel wrench to the jack and place it under
the vehicle towards the front of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the
jack under the center of the spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in
place. The secondary latch has released and
the spare tire is balancing on the jack.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack
until the spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
11. If the spare tire is
hanging from the
cable, insert
the socket end of
the extension
into the hoist shaft
hole on a 45 degree
angle downward.
418
12. Be sure that the socket end of the extension
connects to the hoist shaft.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare the rest of the way.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and
pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the
tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire
or secondary latch system cable has been
reinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.
Always reinstall this cable before driving your
vehicle.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
cable back up if the cable is hanging under
the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire
using the hoist assembly until it has been
repaired or replaced.
419
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs
to be stored with the valve stem pointing
up. If the spare tire is stored with the
valve stem pointing downward, its
secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is
stored with its valve stem pointing up.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire
should always be stored under the vehicle with
the hoist. However, storing it that way for an
extended period could damage the wheel.
To avoid this, always stow the wheel properly
with the valve stem pointing up and have
the wheel repaired as soon as possible.
420
Follow this diagram to store the
underbody-mounted flat or spare tire.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Remove the wheel cap, if the vehicle has one,
from the flat tire by tapping the backside of
the wheel cap with the wheel wrench (A).
Store in a safe location until the flat tire
is repaired. Once the tire is repaired, replace
the wheel cap.
3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and
to the rear. Then pull the retainer (D) through
the wheel opening.
4. Put the socket end of the extension (C)
through the hole just above the rear bumper at
a 45 degree downward angle. Connect the
socket end of the extension to the hoist
shaft (B).
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue turning the wheel
wrench (A) clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. This indicates that the
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
421
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.
If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench and
socket end of the extension to tighten
the cable.
7. Return the equipment to the proper location
in the vehicle as shown next.
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks and Jack
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B) and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to
the slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise
to raise the jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
422
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare
tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 388 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 296 for information regarding proper tire
inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on
how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
on page 410 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 420.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare is correctly inflated. The spare tire
is made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph
(112 km/h) at the recommended inflation pressure,
so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or
replaced as soon as you can and installed back
onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again. Do not mix tires
and wheels of different sizes, because they will not
fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
423
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to
the integrated radio antenna and the rear
window defogger. When cleaning the glass on
your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
424
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
425
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
426
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 458.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue
completely. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your Saab dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 432.Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not
allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches
and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
427
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 427.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get
Saab-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 432.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish
if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the
vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary,
use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe
for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll
over a period of years. You can help to keep
the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may use
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,
if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
428
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the
blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent.
Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use only
Saab-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
429
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish should be repaired right away.
Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your Saab
dealer. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your Saab dealer’s body and
paint shop.
430
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be
loosened before being flushed. Your Saab
dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants
can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take two forms:
blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Saab will repair, at no charge to the owner,
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months or
12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
431
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
432
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
433
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 80.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one
for each headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to turn off. If this
happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.
434
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without like the
radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse, if it
is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located in
the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330
for more information on location.
435
Fuses Usage
1
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High-Beam
Fuses Usage
3
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
4.2L L6 Engine
436
Fuses Usage
5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam
6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam
7 Windshield Wiper
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigarette Lighter
15 Electric Adjustable Pedals
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
Fuses Usage
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center (DIC)
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Canister
27 Backup
28 Powertrain Control Module 1
29 Oxygen Sensor
30 Air Conditioning
31 Truck Body Controller 1
50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Headlamp Driver Module
54 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
57 Ignition A1
59 Regulated Voltage Control
437
J-Case Fuses Usage
14 Trailer Stoplamp/Turn Signal
32 Trailer
33 Anti-lock Brake System
34 Ignition A
35 Driver’s Side Headlamp
36 Blower Motor
56 Air Pump
58 Passenger’s Side Headlamp
62
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Windshield Wiper/Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
Relays Usage
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
55 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
59 Low-Beam Headlamp
60 Ignition 1
61 Powertrain
62
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
438
Fuses Usage
1
Electrically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High-Beam
Fuses Usage
3
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
5.3L V8 Engine
439
Fuses Usage
5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam
6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam
7 Windshield Wiper
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigarette Lighter
14 Ignition Coils
15
Transmission Control
Module/Canister
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center
Fuses Usage
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26 Engine 1
27 Backup
28 Engine Control Module 1
29 Engine Control Module
30 Air Conditioning
31 Injector Bank A
50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Transmission
54 Oxygen Sensor B
55 Oxygen Sensor A
56 Injector Bank B
57 Headlamp Driver Module
58 Truck Body Controller 1
59 Electric Adjustable Pedals
61 Ignition A1
66 Regulated Voltage Control
440
J-Case Fuses Usage
17 Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamps
32 Trailer
33 Anti-lock Brake System
34 Ignition A
35 Blower Motor
36 Driver’s Side Headlamp
62 Passenger’s Side Headlamp
65
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Wiper
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
42 Windshield Washer
Relays Usage
43 High-Beam Headlamp
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
60 Powertrain
63 Low-Beam Headlamp
64 Ignition 1
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
441
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear underseat fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, under the second row
seat. Pull the seat cushion forward to access
the fuse block.
442
Fuses Usage
01 Passenger Door Control Module
02 Driver Door Control Module
03 Liftgate Module 2
04 Truck Body Controller 3
05 Blank
06 Blank
07 Truck Body Controller 2
08 Power Seats
09 Rear Wiper
10 Driver Door Module
11 Amplifier
12 Passenger Door Module
13 Blank
14 Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps
Fuses Usage
15 Blank
16
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
17
Passenger Side Rear Parking
Lamps
18 Locks
19 Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module
20 Blank
21 Locks
23 Blank
24 Unlock
25 Ignition 0
26 Overhead Battery/OnStar
®
System
27 Rainsense™ Wipers
28 Sunroof
443
Fuses Usage
29 Accessory
30 Parking Lamps
31 Truck Body Controller Accessory
32 Truck Body Controller 5
33 Front Wipers
34 Ignition 3
35 Vehicle Stop
36 Transmission Control Module
37 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B
38 Front Parking Lamps
39 Rear Left Turn Signal
40 Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1
41 Front Right Turn Signal
Fuses Usage
42 Radio
43 Trailer Park
44 Rear Right Turn Signal
45 Blank
46 Auxiliary Power 1
47 Blank
48 Ignition 0
49 Not Used
50 Blank
51 Front Left Turn Signal
52 Brakes
53 Truck Body Controller 4
444
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 458 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under
the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.2L L6 Engine 10.8 qt 10.2 L
5.3L V8 Engine 12.2 qt 11.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6 Engine 7.0 qt 6.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L
AWD Transfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
445
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4.2L L6 S Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
446
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 448
Introduction ............................................... 448
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 448
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 448
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 448
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 450
Additional Required Services ..................... 452
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 453
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 455
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 455
At Least Once a Month ............................. 455
At Least Once a Year ............................... 456
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 458
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 460
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 461
Maintenance Record .................................. 462
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
447
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in
good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
448
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how to
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 324.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 450 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 452 and
Maintenance Footnotes on page 453 for further
information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 323.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine parts.
Owner Checks and Services on page 455 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
449
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 458 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 460.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 199. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer has trained
service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 337 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described
in the following for “Maintenance I and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
message comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on
at all for one year.
450
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 334. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 337. An Emission Control Service.
••
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). ••
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 339. See footnote (k).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 396 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a
Month on page 455.
••
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add
fluid as needed.
••
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
••
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g).
451
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. •••
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•••
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 339.
•••
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnotes (g)
and (h).
•••
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service). See footnote (g).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•••
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
452
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
453
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer
liftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link,
roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch
bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks,
and folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks,
and proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.
This service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 344 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
454
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your dealer can
assist you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 458.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 334 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level can
cause damage to your engine not covered by
your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 344 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 388. Check to make sure the
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 406.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 396.
455
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 116.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately
if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.
The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 116.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your
dealer for service.
456
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or others
could be injured and property could be
damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of your vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
457
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 334.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 344.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco
®
Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Windshield Washer Solvent.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
Power Steering Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
specifications.
458
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
specifications. With a complete drain
and refill add 4 ounces (118 ml)
of Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant
Additive (Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 369.
Transfer Case
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 12378508,
in Canada 10953626).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
459
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer.
Part Part Number ACDelco
®
Part Number
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576 TF337
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C
Engine Oil Filter
4.2 L L6 Engine 89017342 PF61
5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6 Engine 12598004 41-103
5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346
Rear 13 inches (33 cm) 15262794
460
Engine Drive Belt Routing
4.2L V6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
461
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 448. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 455 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
462
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
463
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
464
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 466
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 466
Online Owner Center ................................. 467
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 468
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 468
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 469
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ............................ 473
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 474
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 479
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 479
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 479
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .............. 480
Service Publications Ordering Information .... 480
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
465
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or
service departments. Sometimes, however,
despite the best intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has
not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service or parts manager, contact the owner of the
dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, contact the Saab Customer
Assistance Center, in the U.S., by calling
1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contact
Saab Customer Assistance Centre by calling
1-800-263-1999 (English and French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number
in order to give your inquiry prompt attention.
Please have the following information available to
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
Your name, address and daytime phone
number.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
466
The name of the selling dealership and
location.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
Nature and details of the problem you are
experiencing.
When contacting Saab, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
If after contacting the Saab Customer Assistance
Center your concern has not been resolved, please
refer to the “Dispute Resolution Process” found in
your Saab Consumer’s Guide.
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saab
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
Get e-mail service reminders.
Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
Find Saab dealers for service nationwide.
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.saabusa.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
467
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Saab has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with Saab by
dialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Saab encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Saab, refer to the
addresses below.
United States Customer Assistance
Saab Customer Assistance Center
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
468
www.Saab.com
1-800-955-9007
1-866-612-0380 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
Canada Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada, Limited
Customer Assistance Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999 (English and French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-852–9001
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Saab has a strong commitment to customer
satisfaction and has established the Saab Roadside
Assistance Program. As the owner of a new Saab
vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Saab
Roadside Assistance program. This value-added
service is intended to provide you with peace of
mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road
throughout the 4 year/50,000 mile term of your
New Car Limited Warranty..
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
469
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
up to a maximum coverage of $100.
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration and
personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.
In the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
tire, installation of the tire in good condition will
be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow. If your vehicle will not start,
Roadside Assistance will arrange to have your
vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealership.
Alternative Service There may be times, when
Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely
assistance, your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission
of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
470
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over 100 miles,
for U.S. customers, and 250 kilometres, for
Canadian customers, from the original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $1000 for U.S. customers, and $500 for
Canadian customers, to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense incurred within three
days of the disablement you may incur while
waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
In some instances, mechanical failures may be
covered under the Saab Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, for U.S. customers, and the duration of
the Base Warranty, for Canadian customers,
of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty. However,
any cost for parts and labor not covered by
warranty are the responsibility of the vehicle owner
or driver.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. We will make every
attempt to send your personalized trip routing
as quickly as possible, but it is best to
allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be
limited to six calendar year.
We’ll make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it’s best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
471
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.
Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are only
a phone call away. Saab and General Motors
of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Saab and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
472
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help
the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving
situations. Some information may be stored
during regular operations to facilitate repair of
detected malfunctions; other information is stored
only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is
equipped with StabiliTrak
®
, steering performance,
including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and
lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. Saab will not
access information about a crash event or share it
with others other than:
with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
as part of Saab’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
as required by law.
473
In addition, once Saab collects or receives data,
Saab may:
use the data for Saab research needs,
make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar
®
, please
check the OnStar
®
subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine Saab Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally
built. Genuine Saab Collision parts are your best
choice to assure that your vehicle’s designed
appearance, durability and safety are preserved.
The use of Genuine Saab parts can help maintain
your Saab New Vehicle Warranty.
474
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment Saab part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your Saab New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than Saab
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your Saab
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
Saab also recommends that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets your needs
before you ever need collision repairs. Your Saab
dealer may have a collision repair center with
Saab-trained technicians and state of the
art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision
repair center that has Saab-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
475
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your Saab vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your Saab vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with Saab original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from
your current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine Saab Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
If you need roadside assistance, call Saab
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 469 for more
information.
476
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility
for your vehicle. Whether you select a
Saab dealer or a private collision repair facility
to fix the damage, make sure you are
comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work
for a long time.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you have
a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
477
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, Saab recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine Saab
parts or recycled original Saab parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by your
Saab vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine
Saab parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
Saab parts, even if your insurance coverage does
not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
478
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
479
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify Saab. Please call the Saab
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-955-9007,
or write:
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Saab Customer Assistance Center
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999
(English or French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for Saab transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, the Service Bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your Saab dealer or
by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
480
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner manual
will include the Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus
processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus
processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model Saab 9-7x
vehicles. To request an order form, please specify
year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
481
NOTES
482
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 322
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 404
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 166
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 81
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 325
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 434
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 110
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 339
Air Conditioning ........................................... 167
Air Suspension ............................................ 303
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 179
Readiness Light ....................................... 178
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 473
Airbag System ............................................... 64
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 72
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 73
Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 67
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 368
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 275
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ....................... 192
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 261
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System .................................................... 261
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 269
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 184
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 429
Care of Safety Belts ................................ 427
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 431
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 428
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 423
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425
Finish Care .............................................. 428
Finish Damage ......................................... 430
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 426
Leather .................................................... 426
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 430
Tires ........................................................ 430
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 431
483
Appearance Care (cont.)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 432
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 427
Weatherstrips ........................................... 427
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................ 429
Audio System(s) .......................................... 212
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 259
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 261
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 261
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 261
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ......................... 243
Radio with CD ......................................... 214
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 257
Setting the Time ...................................... 213
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 258
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 260
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 261
Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 161
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 341
Operation ................................................. 112
B
Battery ........................................................ 361
Electric Power Management ..................... 164
Run-Down Protection ............................... 165
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 287
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 269
Emergencies ............................................ 271
Parking .................................................... 116
System Warning Light .............................. 183
Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 110
Brakes ........................................................ 358
Braking ....................................................... 268
Braking in Emergencies ............................... 271
Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 106
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 371
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 374
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 372
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 371
Headlamps ............................................... 372
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 371
License Plate Lamps ................................ 376
484
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Replacement Bulbs .................................. 376
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ........... 374
Buying New Tires ........................................ 398
C
Calibration .......................................... 121, 123
California Fuel ............................................. 324
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 322
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 445
Carbon Monoxide ............... 98, 119, 291, 305
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 427
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 261
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 261
Cargo Cover ............................................... 142
Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 143
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 233
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 140
Chains, Tire ................................................. 404
Charging System Light ................................ 182
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 187
Gages Warning Light ............................... 192
Check Gas Cap Light .................................. 194
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 329
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 431
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 44
Infants and Young Children ........................ 40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children .................................................. 50
Older Children ........................................... 38
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .................... 57
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ...................... 59
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ........................ 60
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 48
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 429
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 428
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425
Finish Care .............................................. 428
485
Cleaning (cont.)
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 423
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 426
Leather .................................................... 426
Tires ........................................................ 430
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 431
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 427
Weatherstrips ........................................... 427
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................ 429
Climate Control System
Climate Controls Personalization .............. 173
Dual Automatic ......................................... 167
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 172
Rear ........................................................ 173
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 474
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 35
Compass ............................................ 121, 123
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 102
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 268
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 186
Heater, Engine ......................................... 110
Cooling System ........................................... 349
Cruise Control ............................................. 156
Cruise Control Light .................................... 191
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 139
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 468
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 468
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 466
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab ............ 480
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .......................... 479
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government .................... 479
Roadside Assistance Program .................. 469
Service Publications Ordering
Information ........................................... 480
D
Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 161
Defensive Driving ........................................ 264
Delayed Locking ............................................ 94
Disc, MP3 ................................................... 233
Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 323
Dome Lamp Override .................................. 163
Dome Lamps ............................................... 163
486
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................ 94
Locks ......................................................... 92
Power Door Locks ..................................... 93
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 94
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 24
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 194
DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 195
DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 205
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199
Driving
At Night ................................................... 281
City .......................................................... 285
Defensive ................................................. 264
Drunken ................................................... 265
Freeway ................................................... 286
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 288
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 282
Off-Road .................................................. 281
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 296
Winter ...................................................... 291
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 167
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 243
E
Electric Power Management ........................ 164
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ................................... 434
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435
Headlamps ............................................... 434
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ...................................... 435
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 442
Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 434
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System .................................................... 303
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 339
Battery ..................................................... 361
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 187
Coolant .................................................... 344
Coolant Heater ......................................... 110
Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 186
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 461
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 330
Exhaust ................................................... 119
Fan Noise ................................................ 355
Oil ........................................................... 334
487
Engine (cont.)
Oil Life System ........................................ 337
Overheating ............................................. 347
Reduced Power Light ............................... 191
Starting .................................................... 108
Entry Lighting .............................................. 164
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 473
Exit Lighting ................................................ 164
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 37
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 339
Finish Damage ............................................ 430
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 261
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 150
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 153
Flat Tire ...................................................... 406
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 406
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 420
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................ 341
Power Steering ........................................ 356
Windshield Washer .................................. 357
Fog Lamps .................................................. 162
Front Axle ................................................... 370
Fuel ............................................................ 324
Additives .................................................. 325
California Fuel .......................................... 324
Check Gas Cap Light .............................. 194
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 328
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 326
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 326
Gage ....................................................... 193
Gasoline Octane ...................................... 324
Gasoline Specifications ............................ 324
Low Warning Light ................................... 194
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 442
Windshield Wiper ..................................... 434
488
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light ..................... 192
Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 186
Fuel ......................................................... 193
Oil Pressure ............................................. 190
Speedometer ........................................... 176
Tachometer .............................................. 176
Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 182
Garage Door Opener .......................... 128, 129
Gasoline
Octane ..................................................... 324
Specifications ........................................... 324
Gate Ajar Light ............................................ 193
Glove Box ................................................... 139
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150
Head Restraints ............................................ 15
Headlamp
Aiming ..................................................... 371
Headlamps ......................................... 160, 372
Automatic Headlamp System .................... 161
Bulb Replacement .................................... 371
Headlamps (cont.)
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 161
Electrical System ..................................... 434
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 374
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 372
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 371
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 153
On Reminder ........................................... 160
Washer .................................................... 156
Heated Seats ................................................ 10
Heater ......................................................... 167
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 192
High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 390
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 288
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 288
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 329
Release ................................................... 329
Horn ............................................................ 150
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23
489
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 107
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 40
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 388
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 148
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 163
Cluster ..................................................... 175
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 362
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 89
Keys ............................................................. 87
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 381
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 165
Dome ....................................................... 163
Dome Lamp Override ............................... 163
Electric Power Management ..................... 164
Fog .......................................................... 162
Reading ................................................... 164
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 50
License Plate Lamps ................................... 376
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................. 98
Liftglass/Liftgate ............................................. 98
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 178
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 184
Brake System Warning ............................. 183
Charging System ..................................... 182
Check Gages Warning ............................. 192
Check Gas Cap ....................................... 194
Cruise Control .......................................... 191
Gate Ajar ................................................. 193
Highbeam On .......................................... 192
490
Light (cont.)
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 194
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 187
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 179
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 177
Reduced Engine Power ............................ 191
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 177
Security ................................................... 191
Service All-Wheel-Drive ............................ 192
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator ................................ 185
StabiliTrak
®
Service .................................. 185
Tire Pressure ........................................... 186
Lighting
Entry ........................................................ 164
Exit .......................................................... 164
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 271
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 296
Lockout Protection ......................................... 97
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................ 94
Door .......................................................... 92
Lockout Protection ..................................... 97
Power Door ............................................... 93
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 94
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97
Loss of Control ........................................... 280
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 194
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 141
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................ 9
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 452
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 455
At Least Once a Month ............................ 455
At Least Once a Year .............................. 456
Introduction .............................................. 448
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 453
Maintenance Record ................................ 462
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 448
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ............................... 460
Owner Checks and Services .................... 455
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 458
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 450
Using ....................................................... 448
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 448
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 187
491
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 11
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
with Compass ....................................... 123
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar
®
and Compass ......................... 121
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 124
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 124
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 124
Outside Power Mirror ............................... 123
Moonroof ..................................................... 144
MP3 ............................................................ 233
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 467
N
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ............................. 243
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 106
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 460
O
Odometer .................................................... 176
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 176
Off-Road Driving .......................................... 281
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 278
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 334
Pressure Gage ......................................... 190
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 337
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 38
Online Owner Center ................................... 467
OnStar
®
System, see OnStar
®
Manual ........ 125
Other Warning Devices ................................ 150
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 172
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 166
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 124
Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 124
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 124
Power Mirror ............................................ 123
Overhead Console ....................................... 140
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 455
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
492
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 430
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 117
Shifting Out of ......................................... 118
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 116
Over Things That Burn ............................ 118
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 179
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74
Passing ....................................................... 278
PASS-Key
®
III ............................................. 103
PASS-Key
®
III Operation ............................. 104
Personalization, Climate Controls ................. 173
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 166
Door Locks ................................................ 93
Electrical System ..................................... 435
Lumbar Controls .......................................... 9
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 13
Reduced Engine Light .............................. 191
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 108
Seat ............................................................ 9
Power (cont.)
Steering Fluid .......................................... 356
Windows .................................................. 100
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 37
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 94
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 22
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................ 347
Radios ........................................................ 212
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 261
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 261
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ......................... 243
Radio with CD ......................................... 214
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222
Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 257
Setting the Time ...................................... 213
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 258
Understanding Reception ......................... 260
493
Reading Lamps ........................................... 164
Rear Axle .................................................... 369
Limited-Slip .............................................. 271
Rear Climate Control System ...................... 173
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 97
Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................ 142
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 35
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 257
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 243
Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 32
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 155
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with Compass .......................................... 123
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar
®
and Compass ..................... 121
Reclining Seatbacks, Power .......................... 13
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 458
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 302
Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 191
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................... 90
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire .......................................... 410
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 408
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 376
Replacement, Windshield ............................. 377
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 479
Saab ........................................................ 480
United States Government ....................... 479
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 83
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 108
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 32
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 469
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 296
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 461
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 120
494
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 177
Pretensioners ............................................. 37
Reminder Light ........................................ 177
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 427
Driver Position ........................................... 24
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 35
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 32
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 37
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 31
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 450
Seats
Head Restraints ......................................... 15
Heated Seats ............................................. 10
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 11
Power Lumbar ............................................. 9
Seats (cont.)
Power Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 13
Power Seats ................................................ 9
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16
Secondary Latch System ............................. 416
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 59
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 57
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 60
Security Light .............................................. 191
Service ........................................................ 322
Accessories and Modifications .................. 322
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ..................................... 323
All-Wheel-Drive Light ................................ 192
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 322
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 323
Engine Soon Light ................................... 187
Publications Ordering Information ............. 480
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80
Setting the Time .......................................... 213
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 430
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 117
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 118
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152
495
Spare Tire ................................................... 423
Accessory Inflator ..................................... 404
Installing .................................................. 410
Removing ................................................ 408
Storing ..................................................... 420
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 445
Speedometer ............................................... 176
StabiliTrak
®
System ..................................... 271
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light ........................... 185
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light ............................. 185
Starting Your Engine ................................... 108
Steering ...................................................... 276
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 259
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 151
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ................... 140
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 139
Glove Box ................................................ 139
Luggage Carrier ....................................... 141
Overhead Console ................................... 140
Rear Floor Storage Lid ............................ 142
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 295
Sun Visors .................................................. 101
Suspension ................................................. 303
T
Tachometer ................................................. 176
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps ............................. 374
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 258
Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 101
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 102
PASS-Key
®
III .......................................... 103
PASS-Key
®
III Operation .......................... 104
Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 110
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 151
Tire
Pressure Light .......................................... 186
Tires ........................................................... 380
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 429
Buying New Tires ..................................... 398
Chains ..................................................... 404
Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 406
Cleaning .................................................. 430
Different Size ........................................... 400
High-Speed Operation .............................. 390
If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 406
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 388
Inflator, Accessory .................................... 404
Inspection and Rotation ............................ 396
Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 410
496
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Monitor System ......................... 391
Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 410
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 408
Secondary Latch System ......................... 416
Spare Tire ................................................ 423
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 420
Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 381
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 385
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 400
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 402
Wheel Replacement ................................. 402
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 397
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ................................. 302
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 305
Your Vehicle ............................................. 302
Traction
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 271
StabiliTrak
®
System ................................. 271
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 341
Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 112
Trip Odometer ............................................. 176
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 152
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 151
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 260
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 400
Universal Home Remote System ........ 128, 129
Operation ........................................ 130, 135
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 268
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 296
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 205
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................ 473
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 433
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 433
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 172
Visors .......................................................... 101
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 182
497
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 174
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150
Other Warning Devices ............................ 150
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 402
Different Size ........................................... 400
Replacement ............................................ 402
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 48
Windows ....................................................... 99
Power ...................................................... 100
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades,
Cleaning ............................................... 429
Replacement ............................................ 377
Washer .................................................... 155
Windshield (cont.)
Washer Fluid ........................................... 357
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 377
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 434
Wipers ..................................................... 154
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 155
Winter Driving ............................................. 291
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 239
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 261
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 448
498
492

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Saab 9-7X - 2007 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Saab 9-7X - 2007 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 2,93 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info